JP6660411B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a player is given a gaming value when a display result of a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner is a special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory capable of executing an effect related to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-297368 A

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, there is room for improving the interest of the game by enabling the effect of the movable role to be started immediately after the power failure is restored.

  An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game by enabling an effect by a movable accessory to be started immediately after a power failure recovery.

  In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which a special gaming state that gives a player a gaming value when a display result of a variable display game that varies identification information is a special result, And a starting storage means capable of storing a starting memory which is an execution right of the variable display game based on the establishment of the starting condition, a control of the movable auditor, and a starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. And an effect control means capable of executing the control, wherein the start storage means includes a start memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result in the stored start memory. In the event of a power failure in the state, the start memory serving as the special result is held, and the effect control unit stores the display result of the variable display game in the start memory stored by the start storage unit as a special result. In the case where a power outage occurs in a state where the start memory is included, the movable role is operated in the first operation after the power outage is recovered, and in the variable display game executed after the first operation. Operating the movable auditors in a second operation, operating the movable auditors in a third operation in the special game state executed after the second operation, performing the first operation, In either the second operation or the third operation, the same movable accessory is operated.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, after the power failure is restored, the effect by the movable accessory can be started immediately, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure showing the composition of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure showing the composition of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / status monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability set value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability set value confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure suspension information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure change display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure change display game for each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an ordinary process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (the 1). FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display example (2) of the collective display device during the change of the probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during the probability setting change (the 4). FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a display example (5) of the collective display device during the change of the probability setting. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the collective display apparatus during a probability setting change (6). It is a figure showing other examples of composition of a collective display. It is a figure showing another composition of a collective display. It is a flowchart showing a main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows a reception command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a look-ahead symbol system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch fluctuation | variation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit command process. It is a figure showing signs that a removable part concerning a 2nd embodiment is attached to a game machine. It is a figure showing roughly the example of composition of the game board and parts concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of a game board and parts concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of the parallel-serial conversion part of the identification board concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the 1st modification of an identification board (particularly a parallel-serial conversion part) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the 2nd modification of an identification board (particularly a parallel-serial conversion part) concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing the 3rd modification of an identification board concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of parts collation processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a reference table that associates a model designation command with model identification information in the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on (power recovery) of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the probability set value change processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the set value reception which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of segment LED edit processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of the setting change according to the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display at the time of a setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of setting change of a state display device concerning a 2nd modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display at the time of a setting check concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the modification of the display screen of the display at the time of the setting check concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the example of composition of the game control system concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the input port in the game control apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the signal input into each input port. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 5th embodiment. FIG. 75A is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of holds and the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion effect according to the fifth embodiment (FIG. 75A), and the relationship between the number of holds, the set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75B). It is. The relationship between the priority of the error and the bit of the error code according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76 (A)), and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) (FIG. 76 (B)) FIG. FIG. 77 is a display example of an error code and an error content according to the sixth embodiment, and when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77A), one error is eliminated. FIG. 77 (B) shows the case where all errors have been resolved (FIG. 77 (C)). This is an example of switching the display of error contents according to the sixth embodiment, in which a panel radio wave error is displayed as an initial state (FIG. 78A), and an example in which a frame radio wave error is displayed by operating the operation unit once. (FIG. 78 (B)) and an example of operating the operation unit once to display a switch abnormality error (FIG. 78 (C)). It is a figure showing the example where the removable parts concerning a 7th embodiment were attached to a game machine. It is a figure showing the example which displays information information concerning a 7th embodiment on the display which is displaying the decoration special design of the special figure change display game. It is a figure showing the example which changes the display mode of information information concerning a 7th embodiment according to operation of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the example in the case of prohibiting the drive of a frame decoration apparatus in the parts collation processing concerning 7th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the identification board of the parts concerning a 7th embodiment. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) for associating a model designation command and model identification information according to the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) showing classification of non-conforming models. It is a figure which shows the example in the case of changing the drive mode by classifying parts in the parts collation processing concerning 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board with which a game machine concerning an 8th embodiment is provided. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the light guide plate control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the movable object control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board when the light guide plate concerning 8th Embodiment performs the initial operation. It is a front view of a game board at the time of an initial operation of an internal character and an external character according to an eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board at the time of performing the change display game concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when a reach effect is performed when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. It is a front view of a game board at the time of performing a reach effect in a change display game, when performing initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a modification of the front view of the game board when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. It is a 2nd modification of the front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game when the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the display mode of the fluctuation display game before and after the restoration from the power failure according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a display device when identification information is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and the screen transition of the entire game from when the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode until the special game is started. This is an example. It is a figure which shows the structure aspect and the variation aspect of the decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display device regarding 11th Embodiment. It is a figure regarding the 11th embodiment, which shows the modification of the structure aspect and the variation aspect of the decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display device. It is a table referred to in order to set the configuration mode and the variation mode of the special decoration symbol in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a modification of the table referred to for setting the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol. FIG. 29 is a screen transition diagram (first half) showing a display screen of a display device in chronological order according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 28 is a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the main processing concerning a 12th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the hitting notice processing concerning a 12th embodiment. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a single command processing according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure at the time of the hitting instruction | indication reception process based on 12th Embodiment. FIG. 33 is a screen transition diagram (part 1) illustrating a display screen of a display device in a time series according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 27 is a screen transition diagram (part 2) illustrating a display screen of a display device in a time series according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram (part 3) illustrating a display screen of the display device in chronological order according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a form of an image of a right-handed instruction display according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram exemplifying a color change inside a right-handed instruction display according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 33 is another diagram illustrating a color change inside the right-handed instruction display according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example in which colors are arranged so as to gradually change spatially in accordance with a hue circle in right-handed instruction display according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a screen transition diagram illustrating movement of a right-handed instruction display on a display screen of a display device according to a thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of adding an effect image to a right-handed instruction display according to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presence or absence of each parameter which defines and characterizes the production | presentation mode of an information production with respect to a 13th embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the presence or absence of each parameter which prescribes and characterizes the production | presentation mode of information production regarding a 13th embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the modification of the production mode of the information production by right-handing instruction | indication regarding a 13th embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the production | presentation aspect of the information production by the left-handing instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction as viewed from the player playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame which is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable and closable via a hinge. The opening / closing frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is provided on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front face of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 can be viewed.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 and the like. Can be.

  Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light in accordance with a game state are provided at the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorating devices 18a and 18b each contain an illumination member such as an LED therein, and emit light according to a game state. The illumination members provided inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is provided at each of the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15. Apart from the upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided below the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the up-down direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (toward the player) is provided. The protruding effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect or the like in accordance with the progress of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to a lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball rental operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a luminous effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is interposed in a special figure variable display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or to execute a notice effect in which a result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is announced in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and if the variable display game is simply referred to as a variable figure display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operation device during the non-execution.

  Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the occurrence probability of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a fluctuation display game is high (probable change state, probability change state), or a big hit state (special game state). ), A small hitting game state (small hitting state).

  Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games is executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  Furthermore, whether or not to generate a probability change state may not necessarily be determined by the big hit symbol random number, but may be made to always generate a probability change state when a big hit occurs, or a prize winning device or the like having a specific area may be provided and specified. A probable change state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball rental operation device is an operation device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used for discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These buttons are operated by the player. The balance display section 26 is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED therein, and performs a lighting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 having the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower right speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The shooting speed of the game ball fired from the ball shooting device is set so as to increase as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball firing device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) at which game balls are fired into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and play the game in various firing modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing modes include left-handed (normal hit) in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole 23a penetrating the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation section 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

(Game board)
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of a gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on a front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying (variably displaying) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to a device having a liquid crystal display, but may be a device having a display such as an EL or CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display section) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and a character that creates a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 has an inflow port 40a into a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls rolled on the stage portion 40b are transferred to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and a part of the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the gaming area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure change display game is provided, and immediately below the starting winning opening (second starting winning opening) (second start winning area). A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning region) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the state in which the game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, game balls cannot enter the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general-purpose change display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variable winning device 37 (an easy winning state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the general-floor variation display game or making the hit probability of the general-floor variation display game higher than normal, By making the occurrence time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, the time saving state (general power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that, also in the probable change state (except the latent probable change state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an attacker type in which the large winning opening is opened by turning the upper end side to the front side by the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. The special fluctuation winning device 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and obtains the special winning state. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. In addition, one or a plurality of large winning port LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) that illuminate the large winning port are arranged in and near the large winning port (around the large winning port) of the special variable winning device 39. .

  When a game ball wins a large winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines the type of the winning opening. Are discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21 in accordance with the number of prize balls. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize device 37, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided.

  In addition, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state (see FIG. 2B).

  FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the batch display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure change display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure change for a change display game, which is configured by a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), a variable display unit 53 for general-purpose variable display game (general-purpose display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variable display game It has a storage display unit (a special figure 1 reservation display 54, a special figure 2 reservation display 55, and a general figure reservation display 56) for reporting the number of storages. The special figure 1 hold display 54 includes lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold display 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, a lamp) for notifying that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-handed). D7), a second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. A third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9) for displaying the state, and the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variable winning device 39) are displayed. A round display section 60 (lamp D3-D6) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing a variable display. In addition, all of the LEDs provided as a display are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinking), cyclically turned on (turned on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one of the LEDs), or a plurality. The lighting may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the ordinary figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the general figure display 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for performing a variable display (flashing) in which a lighting display and a non-lighting display are repeated as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and starting of each special figure variable display game. It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for informing the (reserved) storage number. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blink cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52 and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1 and special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED1, special figure 2 hold LED2) display the number of special figure 2 hold (second start storage number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. I do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds when a big hit occurs. However, in a case other than the state of the big hit (including a case where a reach described later occurs on the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10 and the details of the ordinary figure change display game and the special figure change display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstruction nails, windmills and the like arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening. 36, the player wins the normal fluctuation prize device 37 or the special fluctuation prize device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening that has been won is provided via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the general-purpose change display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number for collision determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the general figure variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure variable display game is already running and the general figure variable display game is not ended, or when the result of the general figure variable display game is When the variable prize device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, if the general-purpose starting storage number is less than the upper limit number, the storage number is added (+1).

  The hit figure starting memory stores a hit determination random value for determining a hit / fall of the hit picture variation display game, and when the hit determination random value matches the judgment value, the hit figure variation display is performed. The game results in a specific result mode (specific result).

  The general figure change display game is executed on the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is constituted by an LED that indicates a hit in a lighting state as normal identification information (general figure) and indicates a deviation in a non-lighting state, and blinks the LED to change the normal identification information. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined change display time has elapsed.

  If the ordinary figure random number value extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball is transferred to the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

  At the time of detecting the winning prize ball of the special figure change display game, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random number, each change pattern random number, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in a special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to eight times). The stored number of the special figure start prize storage is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for informing the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) and the special figure 2 change display game (second special figure change display game) are identified by the identification information (the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52). This is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying the special symbols and special symbols. The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like) are varied and displayed in correspondence with each special figure variation display game.

  In the decorative special symbol change display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order (scroll display), the symbols that fluctuate after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure fluctuating display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of a character are performed to enhance interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, the fourth special symbol is repeatedly displayed (flashed) on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 as another decorative special symbol (identification information). fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at a predetermined time after the start, with "off" in the case of a loss, and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

  If the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numerals such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). In other words, the special winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 is widely opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, a privilege is given that a player can acquire many game balls. You.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the random number value of the big hit at the time of detecting the winning is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 changes the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state). Value (number of acquired balls) is small. In addition, in both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state, and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, for example, as in the case of winning a small hit lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting a big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting a small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure change display games are not executed at the same time. It is set as follows.

  As for the decoration special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display regions, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in a device or a display area. In this case, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. Note that the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure change display game, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (39a) ) Uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like includes a machine. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110 with the input section 120 and the output section 130. Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. With the provision, the cost can be reduced by excluding the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  The game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 that is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to change a setting value related to a game condition (game), according to an operation of the operator. And a setting value change switch 102 capable of changing a setting value relating to a game condition. In the present embodiment, the set value related to the game condition (game) is a probability set value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions (such as the small hit probability and the probable inrush rate) other than the big hit probability are also set according to the probability set value. Can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game condition. In the present embodiment, a touch switch signal of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as a determination signal for determining a set value, but an operable determination button switch (an operation unit or an operation unit) is used. A signal from the confirmation button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

  The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are located at positions that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened (a position that cannot be accessed). Is done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100. However, the front frame 12 (main body frame) such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is open. Otherwise, it may be provided at a position that cannot be accessed.

  When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the operator operates the set value change switch 102 (set value change button). This makes it possible to change settings (set values) relating to game conditions such as a jackpot probability and a probability-change rush rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is a setting variable state in which setting (set value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and turns the setting key switch 93 to the ON position to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state in which the setting is being changed is set. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be a variable setting state

  In the present embodiment, the setting values relating to the game conditions are defined in six stages, and are set value 1 (setting 1), setting value 2 (setting 2), setting value 3 (setting 3), setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the setting most disadvantageous to the player, and the setting value 6 is the setting most advantageous to the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the setting value changing process, every time the operator operates the setting value changing switch 102 (setting value changing button), the setting value (setting) is changed from setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting. Change and select as value 5 → set value 6 → set value 1 → set value 2 → ... The setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the setting value change button. Further, the set value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability set value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. Note that the probability set value display device 143 may change the display in direct linkage with the operation of the set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As described later, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure change display section 51 and / or the second special figure change display section 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50. Is also good.

  When a touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100 by the operator touching the operation handle 24, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the set value) is determined and the probability set value in the RWM (storage means) is determined. This is stored in the area, and the setting value change processing ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting is changed, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, the setting). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which:

  On the other hand, after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change the state from the OFF state to the ON state, the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure change display unit 51 and / or the second special figure change display unit 52 for the change display game of the collective display device 50. . The setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by sound from a speaker.

  The set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), and is initialized when the initialization switch is on when power is turned on (power is restored). A switch signal is generated, and processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed based on the switch signal. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111b stores invariable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  The ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, a part of the plurality of display results has already been derived at a stage where the display result has not been displayed yet. It refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game fluctuates a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. In the case where the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle after the display and the result mode is displayed, the state where the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meets the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (Excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect system in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) differs (expected value differs), a normal reach (N reach), a special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the jackpot is set to be higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit occurs). In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a small jackpot for determining the small jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including an execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without various reach or reach), and the like. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  In addition, in the process related to the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure change display game as the current game state, For example, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111a forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball rental.

  An input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34 a of the general-purpose starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning port 36. The switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 are connected, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and low level. Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 which receives a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the special winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like, and detects a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the like. A signal is input from a switch 63 and a front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (body frame) and the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123.

  The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and receives the setting microcomputer switch signal via the data bus 140. 111.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a not-shown test shooting device via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the third input port 124 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. First, an overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and an out ball detection switch signal from an out ball detection switch are taken and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (that is, when the game balls are full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not it is. In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished playing. An out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only a game ball passing through the out port 30b.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system. However, each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test shooting test device of the accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state is impossible.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 outputs opening / closing data of a solenoid (a general-purpose solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b for opening the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

  The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143. In the present embodiment, the probability set value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), and the information of the set value (probability set value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). The value may be output to the probability set value display device 143 via the display.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal based on a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 are provided. Is provided.

  32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  The output unit 130 further includes a driver 150 that receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134 and drives the status display device 152. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality (four) of seven-segment displays (eight-segment displays including a point portion) (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a four-digit seven-segment display (eight-segment display including a point portion), and is capable of displaying the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls. In addition, the state display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the accessory ratio, the ball-out rate, and the number of ejected balls, but may be one that indirectly displays the number of ejected balls, the ball-out rate, and the accessory ratio. Good. That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information on the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls.

  Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passing through the winning opening (the number of winning) and the game passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls which is the number of game balls fired from the ball launching device to the game area 32. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting (counting) the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special fluctuation winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. The number of ejected balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and only up to 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of ejected balls may be displayed by counting up from “00” to “99”.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (acquired number of balls / number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of award balls).

  In the present embodiment, each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100, the payout rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls from 0 to 100. That is, the number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). Each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. Thus, if the acquired ball count (total prize ball count) is displayed as it is on the state display device 152, the payout rate will be displayed.

  For example, the ratio of the bonuses is determined by the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present). Is the percentage (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) (= the so-called continuous role ratio) obtained by winning the special winning opening. It should be noted that the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening (= big winning opening ratio) among all the winning balls. Or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= so-called common use ratio (total common use ratio) )).

(Direction control device)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 are provided.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The output sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via the command I / F 331 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging a hit in a general figure based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 and reads the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and it is judged whether or not the normal figure change display game is hit.

  Then, after the identification symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display, a general symbol fluctuating display game in which the symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the general fluctuating display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the general fluctuating display, the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuating winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, The opening control is performed as described above (for 0.3 second). That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). When the result of the general-floor variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out-of-position on the general-purpose display.

  In addition, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is stored based on the starting memory. A random number for use is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game is hit or not.

  In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the random number value for the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has been hit.

  Then, the CPU 111 a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure change display game is displayed in which the identification symbol is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stop-displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37). Make

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure change display game is a hit. Let it. In the processing for generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls the large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, for example, to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until the above condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2) (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state (probable change state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. Further, even if the high probability state is established based on the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the time-saving state, control is performed so that the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 are in the time reduction operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 per unit time is more controlled than when the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 is in the normal operation state. The control is performed so that the opening time of the battery is substantially increased, so that the power transmission support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) except the latent probability change state, the time reduction state is duplicated and the general power support is executed.

  For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-reduction variation in which the execution time (the general-purpose variation time) of the general-purpose variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time reduction state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction change of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal-floating display game is hit and the normal-variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal-power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control so as to be longer than the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening (for example, four times). Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of the winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is set to the open state by changing any one or more of the general figure fluctuation time, the general figure stop time, the number of general power release times, the general power release time, and the general figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win the normal fluctuation winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased compared to the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, the setting may be made so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. In addition, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated simultaneously, or only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of a main process by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “A ****”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs is executed (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibition state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibition state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, so that the firing of game balls is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (the second input port 123) (A1006). Thus, signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, the glass frame opening detection switch 63, and the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) can be read.

  Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The time of the power supply delay timer is measured by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3). By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of the operation, the operation of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. Or a situation in which the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted can be prevented.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times) ( A1008), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. A determination is made (A1010). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to step A1009 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  Further, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when no power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008 for setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal.

  When the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control device 100 reads / writes RWM (read / write) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. The access to the memory is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in the game microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 150 for driving the state display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

  Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). To darken each LED with power saving, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used on the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In the present embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used by the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (result of A1020 is "Y"), RAM 111c is normal and RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

  FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so that the probability set value area is excluded from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area includes an initial value random number area for storing various initial value random numbers, and a variable pattern random number area for storing variable pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a power failure inspection area 1, a power failure inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. Note that the clear area # 2 includes a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 such as the accessory ratio, and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152. Not.

  In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area, and the game control stack area. An unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. Also, the status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the lowermost part in FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state or during the setting change state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process of changing the probability setting in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

  When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When a signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is open instead of the front frame 12, or whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are open. Is also good. When the signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is in the open state (result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is turned on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the setting (setting value) can be changed, and the setting is in a variable state. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1023 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1024 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1025). If the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is “N”), the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is on (the result of A1025 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of RAM initialization (RAM clear) in steps A1042 to A1045. In this case, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on when the setting key switch 93 is off, the setting value change switch 102 is turned on by the RAM initialization switch ( RAM clear switch). Note that there is actually no situation where the setting value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (the result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means for initializing data is provided.

  In addition, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N” or result of A1018 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is “N”), an abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to a process for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability set value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. By the RAM clear start address 1, the RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability set value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information displayed on the status display device 152.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When a signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch), it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 is open (the result of A1027 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is turned on (result of A1028 is “Y”), the setting is in the variable setting state in which the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM initialization processing in the variable setting state in steps A1036-A1041 ( (RAM clearing process) and the process during the setting change. The RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization processing in this case is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be eliminated.

  When the front frame 12 (body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1027 is “N”) or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1028 is "N"), a command of a setting change instruction for urging the player to change the setting is transmitted to effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the setting change instruction displays a setting change instruction display on the display device 41 that prompts the player to change the setting. According to the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on by the player to change the setting (result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality is eliminated by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. it can.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and waits until the power of the game machine is cut off.

  Next, the processing at the time of normal power-on (at the time of power restoration) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure in an area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Thereafter, the game control device 100 checks an area in the RWM in which the game state is stored to determine whether the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

  Here, when the gaming state is not the high-probability state (result of A1032 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1033 and step A1034 and shifts to the processing of step A1035. If the gaming state is in the high probability state (result of A1032 is "Y"), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50. The ON (lighting) data of the (third game state display section 59, error display) is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and the process proceeds to step A1046. Move on to processing.

  Next, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in the setting variable state and the processing during the setting change in steps A1036-A1041 will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). When the RAM 111c is normal (result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear start address 2 is set. When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is set because the RAM clear start address 1 is set. That is, when the RAM is normal, the probability set value area is not cleared, but when the RAM is abnormal, the probability set value area is also cleared.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. It is possible to output what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability set value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, set value 1) may be saved in the probability set value area as an initial value.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability set value changing flag indicating that the setting is in a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038). Subsequently, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area as initial data when the probability set value is changed (A1039), the value of the probability set value area is loaded, and the probability set value is set. It is saved in the working probability set value area as initial data at the time of change (A1040). Subsequently, a command indicating that the setting is being changed (probability setting is being changed) indicating that the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. The effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting is in the variable setting state (probability setting is being changed) by the command whose probability setting is being changed.

  Next, the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042 to A1045 will be described.

  The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042), and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, the probability set value area is not cleared in the RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by operating the RAM initialization switch (set value change switch 102).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

  In addition, the command at the time of power failure restoration transmitted in the processing of step A1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the processing of step A1045 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine, a hold of special figures 1 and 2, The command includes a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command indicating the number, a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command, and a probability information command indicating the probability state. Also, depending on the state at the time of power-off or power-on, a restoration screen command if the special figure fluctuation display game is running at the time of power-off, and a customer waiting demo command if the customer is waiting at the time of power-off And a power-on command indicating that the power has been turned on. Further, it includes an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sounds of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the like and the sound of the speaker (RAM). Clear) is issued for 30 seconds.

  Furthermore, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a set value information command (probability set value information command) indicating set value information that is information of a set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

  After the processes in steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control device 100 sets a timer interrupt signal and a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Activate (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the execution of the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method of transposing the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random number for determining a big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number for determining small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number for determining hit of common symbol (hit random number), random number for determining hit symbol of common symbol (hit symbol random number) Etc.) as an initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and permit an interrupt (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain unauthorized random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the hit random number are in the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process).

  In addition, the so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which the start value is changed using the initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1051), It is determined whether the signal is on (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (A1049) before the initial value random number update processing (A1050), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update processing, the interrupt processing is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is initialized. By being made to wait by the value random number update processing, it is possible to prevent the interruption processing from being overwhelmed. During the setting change (during the setting variable state), the processing of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 relating to the update of the initial random number need not be executed.

  In addition to the initial random number updating process in step A1050, there is also a method of performing the initial random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, the initial random number updating process is performed in both of them. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, and only in the main processing, the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing. However, there is an advantage that the main processing is simplified thereby.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051. A determination is made (A1053). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON.

  In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is prohibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A1055).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means, when the power is turned on, delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device (the game control device) 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control unit (game control device 100) stores a RAM 111c that can store data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 100 first specifies the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets a higher address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing for inputting signals from various sensors and switches and capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). Note that when a signal of prohibition of firing is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, a signal of firing permission is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a random number update process 1 (A1305) and a random number update process 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Note that when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state), the random number update processing 1 and the random number update processing 2 need not be executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the monitoring of whether there is a normal signal input from the special winning port switch 39a, and the monitoring of errors (front frame, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing a process such as whether the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1307).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability set value change process for changing the probability set value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during setting change) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A1310). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that probability setting confirmation is being performed.

  When neither the probability setting is changed nor the probability setting is confirmed (result of A1310 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. Execute (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure change display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the general view change display game is executed (A1313). When the probability setting is being changed (result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not need to transmit the payout command. Processing (A1311), special figure game processing (A1312), and ordinary figure game processing (A1313) are not executed, and the flow shifts to the processing of step A1314.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure changing game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

  Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet illegal monitoring process of checking a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, a magnet fraud flag is saved in a magnet fraud flag area. Further, a radio wave unauthorized monitoring process (board radio wave unauthorized monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the gaming board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, when there is an abnormality, a vehicular radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the vehicular radio wave fraud flag area.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1317). Then, a state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output processing, the ratio of the accessory, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated as output data to the state display device 152. In the status display editing output process, when the power is turned on (power is restored), the checksum of the status display work area is calculated, and if the checksum does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and the status display The stack area may be cleared. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends. When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank specification are automatically performed. However, depending on the CPU used, the interruption is permitted after the external information editing processing. May be performed, or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the output process.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), further combines the combined data with the output data of the firing permission (A1610), and finally combines the data. The data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (A1611).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets off output data of the probability set value display (A1612). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period in which the probability set value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether the probability set value display permission flag for permitting the display of the probability set value is set (A1613). The probability set value display permission flag is set in a probability set value changing process described later.

  When the probability set value display permission flag is set (result of A1613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the probability set value display data from the probability set value display data area (A1614) and loads the data. The probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). If the probability set value display permission flag is not set (result of A1613 is “N”), the probability set value display data is not loaded, and the off output data is set to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141). (A1615). Therefore, when the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143. When the probability set value display permission flag is not set, the probability set value display device 143 is displayed. Turns off (blank display).

  Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test device, and combines the data with the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 for outputting a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output processing ends.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1621). Here, the display data itself of the probability set value display device 143 (seven-segment display), that is, the probability set value display data of the probability set value display data area, is output as the test signal output data relating to the probability set value. Note that the test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing a set value, or may be other forms of output data. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch-on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1622 is "N"), the test signal output data of the probability set value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (A1624).

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) (A2001). When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation state) (A2002). When the probability setting is not being confirmed (result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring processing from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be manually inserted into any of the winning openings, and it is meaningless to perform the monitoring process or the like, the monitoring process or the like from steps A2003 to A2010 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A2011. I do.

  When the probability setting is not being changed (result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 wins one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39). The mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (A2004).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other one of the two winning opening switches 39a in the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39) (A2005). Then, a fraud & win monitoring process for monitoring a fraudulent winning and detecting a normal winning is executed (A2006).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the start-up 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2007). Then, a fraud and win monitoring process for monitoring a fraud and detecting a normal win is executed (A2008). Subsequently, a winning port monitoring table of a winning port switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning port switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch (SW) 35a of the general winning port 35.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range from 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2013). The details of the gaming machine state check processing will be described later.

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 1 is monitored, and if the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shot ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the abnormal dispensing status signal (discharge abnormal error). Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred or not is executed (A2015).

  By referencing the value of the state scan counter to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is 0, monitoring of the state (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch. Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on a signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (fraud frame fraud) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (result of A2016 is "N"), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017) to determine whether an error has occurred. The game machine state check processing for determining the state of the game machine is executed (A2018).

  When the value of the state scan counter is 0 by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of a disconnection of a switch connector (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. Note that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control (A2019). ), Finish the winning port switch / state monitoring process.

  Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

  In the fraud & winning monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings and the number of obtained balls (sum of the number of winning prizes) for each of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) and the normal variable winning device 37 are counted and stored. Further, information on the number of winning prizes and the number of obtained balls by role may be set as a production command. In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of balls obtained for each property (total of the number of winning prizes) relating to the starting winning port 36 and the general winning port 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as a production command. Also, in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of ejected balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information of the number of out balls is provided as an effect command (out ball number command) May be set as The throwout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of awarded balls (the number of obtained balls for each role) to the number of discharged balls. The role item ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained by each role) obtained by winning the big winning opening out of the total number of prize balls (= so-called continuous role ratio). is there. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the output ratio to the state display device 152 may calculate the ratio of the accessory, the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the like.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the gaming machine state check processing. The gaming machine state check processing is executed in steps A2013, A2015 and A2018 in the winning port switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. Note that the relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is obtained. And prepare (A2204). Further, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2205). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-related signal, and indicates a state of no touch for a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a state-on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state-on command, and prepares. (A2207). Further, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is obtained (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-related signal, and indicates a state with a touch with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the processing in step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1 and sets the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the status-on command is an error-related command, the effect control device 300 starts error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value changing process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability set value changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability set value is being changed (during a variable setting state) (A2401). If the probability set value is not being changed (result of A2401 is “N”), a probability set value confirmation process for confirming the probability set value is executed (A2402).

  When the probability set value is being changed (result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates -1 unless the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2403), and sets the probability set value extinguishing timer to 0. It is determined whether or not (A2404). If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2406. If the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0 (result of A2404 is “N”), nothing is performed, and the process proceeds to step A2406.

  Then, in step A2406, game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). If the probability set value changed flag described later is set, the probability set value has been changed. If the probability setting value has been changed (result of A2406 is "Y"), the processing of steps A2416 to A2421 for terminating the setting change is executed.

  When the probability set value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). If there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the flow shifts to the process of step A2411.

  When there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the value of the work probability set value area by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). Thus, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the value of the work probability set value area is increased by one. When the set value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability set value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability set value area may return to 0. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability set value area correspond to the probability set values 1 to 6 in six stages. Note that the probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the work probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a light-off period (blank period) in which the probability set value display device 143 turns off (blank display).

  In this way, when the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability set value display permission flag, the probability set value display data is set as the probability set value during the setting change (work probability set value). When the probability set value extinguishing timer is displayed on the set value display device 143 and is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Since the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the probability set value extinguishing timer and the light is turned off only for a predetermined light extinguishing period, even when the setting has only one stage (when the setting value is only 1), It can be visually recognized on the probability set value display device 143 that the set value change switch 102 has been operated.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a touch switch signal is input from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (result of A2411 is “N”), the probability set value changing process ends. When the touch switch signal is input (result of A2411 is “Y”), the value of the work probability set value area is loaded and saved in the probability set value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a determination signal for determining the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set values are stored in the probability set value area.

  Note that a configuration is also possible in which the probability set value is determined and stored in the probability set value area when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting key switch 93 was turned off or the setting was changed to a variable state. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. . That is, instead of the operation of the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be used as the confirmation operation.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device 143. Then, a probability set value changed flag indicating that the probability set value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command of the probability set value change indicating that the probability set value has been changed is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control). (A2415), and ends the probability set value changing process.

  In the process of ending the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability set value changing process ends. When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and excludes a probability setting value area and a random number area. Note that the clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, information and flags used for setting change, such as information on the work probability set value area, a flag during the change of the probability set value, and a flag with the changed probability set value are cleared. You.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value at the time of RAM initialization in an area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change has been completed, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and an external device (a hole) that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Computer, etc.). After that, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability set value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability set value display device 143 and maintained.

  Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and returns to the main process (FIG. 5B). The process moves to the process of step A1049. The commands transmitted here include the above-mentioned model designation command, decoration special figure 1 hold number command, decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and completion of probability setting change. Command (RAM initialization command may be used). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command are transmitted. The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the change of the probability setting displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and notifies the initialization of the RAM (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 and the like. Perform for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability set value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the probability set value confirmation process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability set value confirmation mode (a set value confirmable state) in which the probability set value can be confirmed (A2501). When a probability set value check mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the camera is in the probability set value check mode. If the mode is the probability set value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “Y”), the processing after step A2509 is executed.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is being played (A2503). For example, if a variable display game is being executed or a big hit is in progress, it can be determined that a game is being played. When the game is being played (result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability set value confirmation processing is ended so as to disable the confirmation of the probability set value. When a game is not being played (result of A2503 is “N”), it is determined whether or not setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). If the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

  When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value check mode flag (A2505). Thus, when the probability setting value is not being changed (during the setting variable state) (result of A2401 is “N”), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirming mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed ( (Set value can be checked). Subsequently, a probability set value display permission flag is set (A2506). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value in a security signal control timer area so that a security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and the fact that the front frame 12 has been opened can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). The command for which the probability set value is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation processing ends.

  When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value confirmation mode (result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is turned on (A2509). If the setting key switch 93 is ON (result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability set value confirmation mode continues, and the probability set value confirmation probability set value confirmation processing ends.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off (result of A2509 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability set value checking mode flag (A2510). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability set value confirmation mode ends. Then, in order to prevent the probability set value from being displayed on the probability set value display device 143, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command to end the probability set value confirmation indicating that the probability set value confirmation has been completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2512).

  In the above description, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). However, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, if the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on when the power is turned on (restored power), the setting is changed (setting change state), and the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch is turned on. If the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the RAM initialization switch is turned on, the RAM can be initialized (RAM cleared). If the initialization switch is off, the power supply may be turned on (recovery of power supply) in a normal state. Further, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start-up switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the starting winning port 36 and the ordinary variable winning apparatus 37 forming the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is performed. At the stage before the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of a game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating −1. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2619.

  If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the processing is set in the register (A2605). Further, a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is performed using the special figure game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the change of the special figure change display game, and sets the start of the change of the special figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. The special figure ordinary processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, sets information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process, and the like. The processing during the figure change is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure change processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, The special figure display process is performed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, and to set information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (effect command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability) is set, A processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set necessary information such as a small hit fanfare command (production command) and a small hit fanfare time, and set a processing number “7” relating to the processing during the small hit fanfare. Then save it in the special map game processing number area. If the result of the special figure change display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “3” in Step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and updates the information necessary for performing the special winning opening process. A fanfare / interval processing for setting is performed (A2611). For example, in the processing of the fanfare / interval, necessary information such as a round command (production command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and a processing number relating to the special winning opening processing. "4" is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the last round, and sets an ending command if it is the last round, A special winning opening process is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening residual ball process (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening processing, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as a rendering command is set, a processing number “5” relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. To save.

  If the game processing number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the last round, A special winning port remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). For example, in the special winning port remaining ball processing, if it is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the last round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number “6” relating to the big hit end processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  If the game processing number is “6” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot ending process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2614). For example, in the big hit end process, necessary information such as a probability state after the big hit state is completed and a general power support state (time saving state) after the big hit state is set, and the probability state and the time saving state are set to the probability information command (production) Command), a processing number “0” related to the special figure ordinary processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area. The probability information command includes a probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the number of continuous games in the normal power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state (the number of times of time reduction fluctuation, the number of times of electricity support). Information is included.

  When the game processing number is “7” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets information necessary for performing the small hit processing. (A2615). For example, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning prize is set, a processing number “8” related to the small hit middle processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). For example, in the small hitting middle processing, necessary information such as a small hitting remaining ball processing time is set, a processing number “9” relating to the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “9” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as a small hit ending time is set, a processing number “10” relating to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure ordinary process (A2618).

  When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then sets the special figure 1 display. A symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). After preparing a special figure 2 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), a symbol change control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the starting port switch monitoring processing (A2601) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start-up switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning port 36 (A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being reduced (in the state of supporting the general electric power) (A2704).

  If the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special figure time reduction (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, when it is during special figure time reduction (during normal power support state) (result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2705). A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the winning prize port 36 does not win unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless it is right-handed. If the player does not hit the ball right, the game ball does not pass through the normal starting gate 34. Therefore, in the power-generating support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-handed driving. In the case where the player has left-handed, the right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) for instructing right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquiring process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning port. A determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of Step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary power is occurring (A2713). If the number of unauthorized winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of unauthorized occurrence determinations (for example, five), it is determined that unauthorized unauthorized access is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or injustice has occurred. In the case where such a game ball wins in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  When the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714). Then, the special figure start port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. In addition, in A2713, when it is determined that a normal power fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special drawing starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs information on the number of winnings to the monitored start-up switch among the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output frequency area of the RWM (A2904), and the flow shifts to the process of step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (the number of start storages) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target opening opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates an address of a random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. It is saved in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the flow shifts to the processing of Step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes a special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and effect command setting processing (A2918) is executed to execute the special figure start port switch common. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning prize port 36 or the start winning prize area of the normal variable winning device 37, and has the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as a first start storage up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (A2916) in the start port switch common processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure suspension information determination process. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead (prior determination) processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning in the start winning port 36 (result of A3001 is “N”), the process shifts to a process of step A3004. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure is during the time reduction (general power support state) (A3002).

  When it is during the special figure time reduction (during the ordinary power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination processing. On the other hand, if it is not during the special figure time reduction (result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is being made (A3003). When a big hit or a small hit is in progress (result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the game is not in a big hit or a small hit (result of A3003 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit. Is executed (A3004). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is obtained (A3007), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first start port (start winning port 36) is won (A3008). If it is not a winning in the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  If the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (A3013), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. The information is acquired (A3012), and the flow shifts to the process of Step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start-up switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed (A3016), and fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), Effect command setting processing is performed (A3019), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. The special figure information setting processing in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting processing in step A3017 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure ordinary processing. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  With the above processing, a pre-reading symbol command including the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the pre-reading target and a pre-reading fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) to form a preliminary judgment means. In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening processing is being performed (A3101). If the special winning opening is being processed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning game opening process is not being performed (the result of A3101 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning game remaining ball is being processed. A determination is made (A3102).

  When the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a process of step A3105. If the special winning game remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting medium processing is being performed. (A3103). If the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process shifts to the process of step A3105. When the small hitting process is not being performed (result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball process is being performed ( A3104). The special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, and thus the progress of the game can be checked based on the special figure game processing number.

  When the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the processing of step A3105. Then, the winning counter is set to 0 (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one of the special winning opening switches 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (A3115). If the special winning opening ball is being processed (result of A3115 is “Y”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and if the special winning opening remaining ball is not being processed (result of A3115 is “N”), It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball is being processed (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (A3117), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 "). ) Is determined (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3118 is “Y”), the winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the small hitting process is not being performed (the result of A3121 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hitting process is being performed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 suspension number (second startup storage number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). When the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (A3209). Is “N”), a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that it is in a customer waiting demonstration state (a state of a customer waiting demonstration) is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demonstration command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets "0" as a process number to a special map ordinary process (A3212). A3213). On the other hand, in step A3209, if the customer waiting demonstration has already been started (result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special map ordinary processing is ended.

  As described above, the customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted when the special figure 1 reservation number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 reservation number (second startup storage number) are 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs the setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demonstration command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is turned off.

  When the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the decoration figure corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number. The figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process ends.

  As described above, the check of the number of special figure 2 reservations is performed before the check of the number of special figure 1 reservations, so that if the number of special figure 2 reservations is not 0, the special figure 2 change start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed prior to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the change symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is performed (A3402). The details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3406).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting information on a change start of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start processing. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 1 change display game, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 change symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game, and is the same processing as the processing in the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. 18 except for the second start storage. Is what you do.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting information on the big hit flag 2 and big hit information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared (A3505).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). Then, a variation start information setting process for setting information on the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, for the special figure 2 change display game, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” relating to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (for example, 100 ms) (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 change start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601) and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to 0. (A3604). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the missed information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether or not the prepared big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit or not. A small hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. The data is overwritten and saved (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the loss information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. The process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this processing, the same processing as the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 20 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). After that, a big hit determination process for determining whether or not a big hit is determined according to whether or not the prepared big random number value matches the big hit determination value is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “N”), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to the probability set value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table defines an upper limit determination value according to the probability set value for each of the case of the high probability state and the case of the low probability state. Then, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier (other than the big hit) as the determination result (A3808) and ends the big hit determination processing. I do.

  When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probable change state). (A3804). If the state is in the high probability state (result of A3804 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value during high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3805). On the other hand, when the state is not the high-probability state (result of A3804 is “N”), the upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set using the upper-limit determination value table in accordance with the probability setting value (A3806).

  When the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), an outlier (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “N”), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure suspension information determination process and the like.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). Note that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the above-described big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure change display game becoming a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination. However, a configuration in which a unique small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (the special figure 1) is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets an outlier as the judgment result (A3904), The determination processing ends.

  Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) becomes the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (A3903). If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), a loss is set as the judgment result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is “N”), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
FIGS. 24A, 24B, and 24C show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure change display game determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrated for each setting (each setting value).

  The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (becomes higher), and the larger the set value is, the more likely a big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The big hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the big hit random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the range of the lower limit judgment value or the value of the jackpot random number in addition to the upper limit judgment value in accordance with the set value. In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability and the jackpot probability at the time of high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player has a pleasure of estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, and 3 (the set values 1, 2, and 3) and the settings 4, 5, and 6 (the set values 4, 5, and 6) are the same. Is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (becomes higher). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), so that the player is not bored.

  In the example of FIG. 24C, the big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability are the same regardless of the setting (set value). In this case, the player estimates the setting (set value) from another setting determination element.

  Other setting discriminating factors include the probability change inrush rate (described later), the number of times that the general power support has been continued after the end of the big hit (described later), the number of times the probability change state has continued on the ST machine, the number of big hit rounds (the upper limit of the number of rounds) There are a variation pattern (variation time value) of the figure variation display game, various times set in the special figure game process (stop display time, fanfare time, and the like). If the probabilities that predetermined contents of these setting discrimination elements are selected are made different for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting values from these setting discrimination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (A3403) in the special figure 1 change start processing will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) ) Is loaded with jackpot symbol random numbers (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing. In other words, the effect mode transition information allows the effect mode to be shifted upon a big hit. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop symbol pattern of the big hit (probable variable big hit symbol / usual big hit symbol etc.), so the big hit symbol type (big hit type) and the big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode that transitions later changes. Further, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state, and therefore, the effect mode transition destination is also affected by whether or not the current state is the special figure high probability state (probable change state).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (the result of A4011). Is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4011). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode shift information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted upon a small hit. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the loss stop symbol pattern is changed to the stop symbol pattern. It saves in the area (A4017), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4019), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4020). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (A3503) in the special figure 2 change start processing will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101). If the jackpot is a jackpot (result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of the special result (big hit type) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”) and used in the big hit end processing. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of a miss in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4113), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4114). This decoration special figure command is transmitted to effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Example of special map jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table exemplifying the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-described special figure game processing for each setting.

  FIG. 27 illustrates, for each setting, a jackpot symbol table that defines the jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) indicating the types of jackpots and the distribution ratio thereof. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the big hit symbol numbers (big hit types, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value). This is advantageous. In addition, the probability-change entry rate is a ratio of the probability-change big hit symbol that the probability state after the big hit end becomes high probability to all the symbols. In addition, the number of times of the general power support after the end of the big hit, especially for a normal big hit (the probability state after the end of the big hit becomes a low probability) becomes larger as the set value becomes larger in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 growing. Setting 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and setting 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are set to the same number of times of regular power support. In the ST machine, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of continuations of the probable change state increases as the set value increases.

  In FIG. 27, the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given in one big hit does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value increases. Various configurations are also possible. Also, in FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game than to the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game has the special figure. This is more advantageous to the player than the one-variation display game.

  Note that, similarly to FIG. 24C, a configuration in which the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) is the same regardless of the setting (set value) is also possible.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The symbol that is changing can be determined from the changing symbol determination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). The effect control device 300 that has received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, 600 msec is commonly set as the display time.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure displaying process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves a signal related to the end of the change in the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the stop of the fluctuation in the special figure 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, (A4710). Further, as the information for controlling the special figure 2 change display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag relating to the change stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special figure game process, and a symbol variation control process in a general-purpose game process described later. The symbol change control process is to control the change of the special symbols (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and the ordinary symbols (ordinary figure) of the variable display game in the variable display section of the collective display device 50, and the special symbol and the normal symbol. This is a process for setting the display data of the symbol.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether the fluctuation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the ordinary figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of the present embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, and the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614). (For stop) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

  When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for changing) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for display, display table 1) is defined on the change control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  If the updated flashing control timer is 0 (result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process ends.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the variable flag for the symbol to be controlled is not varying (result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (A7510), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control processing is ended.

  As the initial value of the blink control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blink control timer initial value. The initial value of the blink control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  The corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared for the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number reaches the upper limit value of the variable symbol number by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1). ) Are sequentially updated. In steps A7508 and A7511, a setting is made to acquire and display the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number, and update (change) the number of illumination patterns equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Is performed, a cycle of display is repeatedly performed.

  By defining the blink control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are repeated. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose game process. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

  Next, if the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the game control device 100 A general-purpose game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the general-purpose game processing number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, and sets the start of the variation of the general-purpose variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the like. A normal map ordinary process for setting information necessary for performing the normal diagram change process is executed (A7608). Details of the ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, when the game processing number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-floor change process for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display process ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the general figure, in order to shift to the process of displaying the general figure, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general figure game processing number area. Save in the processing timer area.

  If the game processing number is “2” in step A7607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction state is set if the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a hit. The general-figure display process is performed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the general-floor process (A7610). For example, in the normal map display process, if the result of the normal map change display game is a hit, the game process number is set to “3” and the general map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit display process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, in order to shift to the normal drawing ordinary processing, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general drawing game processing number area.

  When the game processing number is “3” in step A7607, the game control device 100 performs continuation of the normal processing per ordinary map or setting of information necessary for performing ordinary electric remaining sphere processing. The middle processing per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal drawing per game process, the game process number is set to "4" after the setting for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times is performed, and then the process proceeds to the normal power remaining ball process. Save to the general game processing number area.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general electric remaining sphere process for setting information necessary for performing a general map end process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal game remaining sphere processing, in order to shift to the general figure end processing, the game processing number is set to “5” and saved in the general figure game processing number area, and the general figure ending time is set to the general figure ending time. Save in the processing timer area.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a general-purpose hit end process for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose ordinary process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the per-chart end processing, the game processing number is set to “0” and saved in the per-chart game process number area in order to proceed to the perpetual map normal process.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a general-figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the general-figure display 53 (A7614). Thereafter, a symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and thereafter.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the general-purpose game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A7702). The game state in which the player hits right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general power support state). If the game state is a right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “Y”), the flow shifts to the process of step A7705. If it is not the right-handed gaming state (result of A7702 is “N”), a left-turn instruction notification command (left-turn instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-turn instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) for instructing left-turn on the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 obtains the number of reserved general-purpose drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved general-purpose drawings is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the number of ordinary drawing reservations by +1 (A7706) and corresponds to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations. The address of the hit random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is “N”), or when it is determined that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (A7608) in the ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the routine of the ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved ordinary figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM (for 1 reserved number), and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary figure of RWM is loaded. The winning symbol random number is loaded from (the number of holdings 1), and the loaded random number storage area per symbol (for holding number 1) and the symbol random number storage area per ordinary symbol (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7902). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than normal in the general-figure high probability state (in the high-probability state), that is, whether or not the time reduction state (general power support state). (A7903). In addition, the probability per figure in high probability is 250/251, and the probability per figure in low probability is 0/251.

  When the game is not in the probable high probability (the result of A7903 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) that is the lower limit determination value in the probable low probability (A7904). If the figure is in the high figure high probability (the result of A7903 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) which is the lower limit determination value in the figure figure high probability is set (A7905), and in step A7906 Move on to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or more than an upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit determination value here is common between the high probability of the general figure and the low probability of the general figure. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (result of A7906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of the range, the flow shifts to the process of step A7908. If the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

  When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, when the hit is a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7908). Further, a lost stop symbol number is set as a normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), and the lost symbol information is saved in a normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the flow shifts to the process of step A7914.

  If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “N”), that is, if it is a winning, the gaming control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7911), The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. It should be noted that there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the random number storage area per symbol. (A7916), after clearing the empty area after the shift to 0 (A7917), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by -1 (A7918).

  In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are on hold after the general-family reservation number 1 are moved up by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 of ordinary figure reservation in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the number of ordinary figure reservation is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 3, and saves the fluctuation time in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the fluctuation time is distributed to 500 msec at a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec at a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec at a probability of 16/256. Then, a normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing is executed (A7921), and the normal-figure normal processing ends. For example, in the normal figure change process transition setting processing, “1” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure change process, and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area. Then, the flash control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) which is the initial value of the flash cycle timer of the general symbol display is saved in the general symbol flash control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) is set in the general symbol change symbol number area. Save.

  Further, when the number of reserved ordinary maps is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the ordinary daily diagram processing (A7922). Then, the processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the ordinary processing in the ordinary figure is terminated.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1311), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), It performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device, and setting the information in an output buffer.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If a body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and off data of the security signal is stored in the external information output data. It is saved in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”) or when the body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the door / door. The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). A determination is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or when the setting change is completed. (A1044 and A2419 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is measured from the time of initialization of the RAM or the time of completion of the setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated to change the setting (setting change mode) or the setting check state (setting check mode) ( A1037 and A2507 of the main processing), during the setting change (during the setting variable state) in which the probability setting value changing flag is set, and in the setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value checking mode flag is set, the security signal is output. You may make it output continuously. When the probability set value changing flag is set (A2414), not when the probability set value changing flag is cleared (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the output of the security signal is stopped. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the ON data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and shifts to a process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet irregularity is not occurring (result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not panel radio irregularity is occurring (A9511). It should be noted that when the dish radio fraud flag is saved in the disc radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the dish radio is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the general fraud fraud is occurring (A9513). When the irregularity of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the irregularity of the special winning opening is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the improper winning award occurrence flag regarding the special winning opening is saved in the improper flag area by the improper and winning monitoring process, it can be determined that the improper winning opening is being generated. In the case where the special winning opening illegality is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

  When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a connector of the switch (the above-described switch abnormality 1 error) is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data of the game machine error state signal to the test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (A9516). When a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9515 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that if the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is “Y”), if the panel radio fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the frame radio fraud is generated Is in progress (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the irregularity of the telephone is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the irregularity of the winning opening is occurring (the result of A9514 is “Y”). Y "), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9517), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518). By setting the ON data of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

  After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start-up signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the start-up opening (A9520).

  Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to 0.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is output to the external information output data. The area is saved in the area (A9523), and the external information editing process ends.

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 outputs the ON data of the symbol determination number signal to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process ends.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed (during the setting changeable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a light emission mode (lighting / light-off mode).

  During the change of the probability setting, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure change display game of the collective display device 50 irrespective of the state of the gaming machine 10 (game state or the like) at the time of power-off before power-on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively performs the predetermined display during the change of the probability setting regardless of the state of the collective display device 50 when the power is turned off. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (variable setting state), the probability setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display unit 51, 52 for the special figure variable display game which is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be performed.

  In FIG. 34A, while the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state), a predetermined special figure change display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 change display game of the collective display device 50 is displayed. The probability set value (here, 6) is displayed. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, the first special figure change display unit 51 performs a display different from that when the change is stopped (a display different from the normal display), so that the gaming machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a change display game). Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. Note that, in the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used.

  For example, the game control device 100 determines the third output port 135 and the third output port 135 based on the probability set value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability set value and the probability set value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability set value. The output data may be output to the four output ports 136, and the work probability set value or the probability set value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (A1603- of output processing). A1608).

  Note that the probability set value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the probability set value may be lighted or blinked using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

  Furthermore, even if the probability setting value is made weaker than usual and the probability setting value is lit or blinked, it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value in a place away from the gaming machine 10. Good.

  In FIG. 34B, a changing information display indicating that the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) while the probability setting is being changed. (For example, the letter “P”) is displayed. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. In the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the same identification information (special design) as the change-in-progress information display (for example, the character “P”) is not used. Shall be.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the output data related to the display of the changing information to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. May be executed (processing steps are added to FIG. 10), and the changing information display may be lit on or flashed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At the time (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is lit on or flashed on the first special figure change display section 51 (LED lamp D1). You may.

  The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be lit or blinked using both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34C, during the change of the probability setting, the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the fluctuation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 as a predetermined display. . In the present embodiment, the outlier result (outer design) is a display in which the center segment of the first special figure change display section 51 (7-segment LED lamp D1) is turned on. In this manner, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 during the change of the probability setting, it is possible to suggest from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. The RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the result of the loss (missing design) is displayed while the probability setting is being changed, thereby initializing the data displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51. In some cases, the value setting (A2419) becomes unnecessary.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines the result of the loss (the loss symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. A process for generating output data relating to display is executed (processing steps are added to FIG. 10), and the display of the outlier result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). . Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At this time (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the loss result may be displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). .

  In addition, the display of the outlier result may be lit on the second special figure change display unit 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 change display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the display of the outlier result may be lit by using both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34D, while the probability setting is being changed, a light-off display is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure change display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. It can be clearly shown on the front of 10. Note that, in the stop display of the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 when the change is stopped, the light-off display is not used.

  For example, the game control device 100 transmits the first characteristic to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 from when the power is turned on (power is restored) until the probability setting value is changed (the result of A2406 is “Y”). The output data for the figure variation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51.

  The second special figure change display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 change display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. In addition, both the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 may be turned off.

  In FIG. 34A to FIG. 34D, during the change of the probability setting, the LED lamps (for example, the LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure change display game are turned off. Alternatively, the animation may be displayed by turning on the light cyclically.

  In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, during the change of the probability setting, all display units (that is, all light-emitting units: LED lamps D1 to D18) of the collective display device 50 are lit or blinked, so that the predetermined display is obtained. , The all-lit display or the all-blink display is displayed on the collective display device 50. As described above, during the change of the probability setting, by performing a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the collective display device 50 at the time of the fluctuation stop, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is impossible to play the game in front of the gaming machine 10. Can be specified.

  Note that the all-blinking display in FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the collective display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 displays all the lights or blinks on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. A process of generating output data related to the display may be performed to display the all-lit display or the all-blinked display on the collective display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). Further, for example, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on while the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open (the result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. At this time (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the all-on display or the all-flashing display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). .

  FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, a performance display related to the performance (specifications) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50. The performance display is printed, but may be displayed by light emission of an LED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As the performance display, the big hit probability display 85a "1/300 and 1/200" at the time of the low probability in the setting 1 (lowest setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), the display of the number of award balls 85b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14," the upper limit of the number of rounds A value display 85c "2, 6, 16", a model (formal name) display 85d "CRxxxxxx", and a display 85e (here, "no limit") indicating whether or not there is a limit related to the probability change big hit are displayed.

  In the display 85b of the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls of the starting prize port 36, the normal variable prize apparatus 37, the general prize port 35, and the special variable prize apparatus 39 are sequentially displayed. The limit relating to the probability variable jackpot means that the number of consecutive variable probability jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (a single jackpot can generate a predetermined number of hits (number of consecutive play). Become).

  Since the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of the low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the free space around the collective display device 50. In addition, the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), and the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is set to 1 (lowest setting) and 6 (highest setting). Either one (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the big hit probability (1/300 to 1/200) at the time of low probability may be displayed.

  Among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 (the jackpot probabilities of the settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) are collectively outside the game area 32. The information may be displayed in an empty area of a member separate from the display device 50. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 on this separate member may be displayed in duplicate. For example, the big hit probability at the time of low probability with respect to the setting 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the upper right, lower left, upper left free space of the game board of FIG. 2A, or a member (guide rail 31) that divides the game area 32. You may. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in a free area in the game area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 at the lower left). In addition, the display 85e of the presence or absence of the limit related to the probability change jackpot is displayed as "limited" only when there is a limit, and there is no need to display anything when there is no limit. Thus, the items displayed as performance indicators around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds at the time of the big hit is displayed on a separate area or the display device 41, and some or all items displayed as the performance display are displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary. It does not have to be displayed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may display, on the display device 41, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, and the like during the setting change, the setting confirmation, and / or the waiting for the customer. . The effect control device 300 may store the big hit probability at the time of low probability in a memory (the program ROM 321 or the like) in advance. Note that what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. Switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be executed by operating an operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B show a predetermined display (here, the probability setting value 6) on the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52 of the collective display device 50 during the change of the probability setting. In the case where is displayed, a configuration is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (especially the probability setting value) from the oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 during the change of the probability setting.

  In FIG. 35 (A), two depressions 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided on the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure change display part 51 or the second special figure is provided in each of the depressions 51a and 51b. A change display section 52 is provided. In FIG. 35 (B), an annular wall 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52 is provided on the front of the collective display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Hereinafter, the control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 using the effect control program will be described.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. Note that, in the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the reference sign (number) of the step is represented as “B ****”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, effect controller 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, a command reception interruption process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, effect controller 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the power-on initial value is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, effect controller 300 clears a WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Thereafter, effect control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a clock unit (B0009).

  In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process proceeds to step B0009. In addition, the configuration may be such that the RTC reading process is executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, when the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. Then, effect control device 300 may execute various processes using a time timer instead of RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 can be reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. By randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability according to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be selected so that the selection rate at a long time interval becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by performing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, a lottery may be selected so that the selection rate of a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. An effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for receiving operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by a person in charge of a game arcade (game store) or a player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs an effect point control process of adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production points are added by performing a production or operation that is the target of production point addition, and at the end of a game, for example, at the end of a game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by randomly selecting a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability according to the set value. For example, lottery may be performed so that the selectivity of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes a received command received from game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41 or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. An effect display editing process is performed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the rendering preparation to the display frame buffer is completed, and the rendering command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 An instruction to draw a screen is issued (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame switching is performed, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (１ ／ of the frame period). . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 second.

  Further, effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from speaker 19 (B0019).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) including the LEDs (B0020). In the decoration control processing, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (a board effect device 44, a frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control processing, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

  Then, after finishing the process of B0021 described above, effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing (B0014) in the main processing (FIG. 36) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as a command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the number of received commands is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and thus the received command check processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to a command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, data is not overwritten.

  Then, effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read out in the order of the indexes and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if the copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N )), And repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, the analysis of the received command is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing an empty area without directly analyzing the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the received command to analyze the content. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101 is performed. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (result of B1110 is “N”), the processing of steps B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (B1108) in the received command check processing (FIG. 37) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a received command analysis process performed by effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command into a MODE part and the lower byte into an ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of the command. You. Therefore, the higher order and lower order of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether the value is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variation command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special decoration symbol, and includes a variation command (set in a variation start information setting process). If the MODE section indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (result of B1205 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a production during a hit (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, and the like). During interval processing), interval command (set during opening special winning opening process), ending command (set during processing during opening special winning opening), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), A small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) and the like. And so on. If the MODE section indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent a hit-related command (result of B1207 is "N"), effect controller 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the symbol-related command (B1209). The symbol-related commands include a decorative special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decorative special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section indicates a symbol command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbolic command (result of B1209 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section falls within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section indicates a one-shot command (the result of B1211 is “Y”), one-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the range of the prefetching symbol command (B1213). . The look-ahead design related commands include the aforementioned look-ahead stop design command (A3014 in FIG. 15). If the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol-related command (result of B1213 is “Y”), a pre-reading symbol-related command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the prefetching symbol command (the result of B1213 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is in the range of the prefetch variable command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes the aforementioned prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE section indicates the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch variable command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( The result of B1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a single-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot system command process ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (result of B1301 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is performed (B1304), and a single-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE section indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the command at the time of restoration from the power failure (the result of B1305 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demonstration command ( B1307). If the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (result of B1307 is “N”), then the mode part displays the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (A2917, A3207). It is determined whether or not to proceed (B1309). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1310), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (A2917, A3203). ) Is determined (B1311). Then, when the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (result of B1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). Then, when the MODE section indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command (step B1313). B1315). As the error / illegal command, for example, a fraudulent command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud occurs), a fraud release command (set in fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud is released), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a state ON command, generation of a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and generation of a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame) Release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  If the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or improper notification is executed (B1316). The one-shot command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), then the mode control unit 300 sets the mode switching command (processing during special figure display). Is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE section indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an effect mode switching command (result of B1317 is "N"), then effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out-ball count command. (B1319). If the MODE section indicates the out-ball count command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball count reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE section does not represent the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then proceeds to the MODE section for counting commands (A3107, A3111 big winning opening count commands). Is determined (B1321). If the MODE section indicates a count command (result of B1321 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B1322), and the single command processing ends.

  If the MODE section does not represent a count command (result of B1321 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Also, as described above, the setting value information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the end of the probability setting change, in accordance with the probability setting change end command in step A2421. If the MODE section indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single command processing is terminated. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

  If the MODE section does not represent the set value information command (result of B1323 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of the setting change command include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). If the MODE section indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), a setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting processing, the contents of the setting change type command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for a setting change instruction is received, a setting change instruction display for urging a player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41 in the setting change information setting processing. Also, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change information setting process, a display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

  If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). . As a command of the setting confirmation system, for example, there is a command (A2508) for confirming a probability set value, and a command (A2512) for finishing confirmation of a probability set value. If the MODE section indicates a setting confirmation type command (result of B1327 is “Y”), a setting confirmation type information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting processing, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability set value is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section command is a normal command ( B1330).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”), effect control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game is performed after all symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which the present process is executed, the game state flag is changed to the flag of “changed”, “big hit”, “small hit”. Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the look-ahead symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetching symbol command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, if the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). When the latest suspension information is the information of the special figure 1 reservation (result of B1601 is “Y”), the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations. Save (B1602).

  If the latest suspension information is not the special figure 1 reservation information (result of B1601 is “N”), effect controller 300 is the decoration special figure reservation number command received most recently is the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. In this case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number (B1603).

  After steps B1602 and B1603, effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variable command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the game control device 100 transmits the pre-reading symbol system command followed by the pre-reading variable system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol command processing ends.

[Prefetch variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, details of the prefetch variation command processing (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetch variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch variation command (B1701). When the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of the prefetch variable command is waiting. If the reception of the prefetch variable command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable command processing ends. If reception of a prefetch variable command is waiting (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds in the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest hold information (B1703), The sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and a sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, effect controller 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and the number of pending parts. The prefetch variable command area (special figure 1 prefetch variable command area or special figure 2 prefetch variable command area) is saved (B1708). Then, a pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the change starts the change display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, a longer first half change occurs, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, a shorter first half change occurs. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half change is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation command is converted into the sub-prefetching variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

  Further, since the type of the reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal prefetching change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 uses the ACT part (the value of the latter half variation) of the prefetch variation command as it is without converting it, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop and miss, normal reach +1 stop and miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT units indicating the reach of the same system into the same sub-internal prefetch variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-internal prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is not normal (result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetch variation command processing is terminated.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after the conversion is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), effect controller 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the prefetch variable command area. (B1711), a prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the look-ahead effect include a continuous notice effect (including a look-ahead effect with a chance), a look-ahead zone effect, a change notice on hold, and the like. Next, it is determined whether or not the latest pending prefetch effect (preliminary change notice) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending prefetching effect occurs (result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching effect that occurs (such as a pending change notice) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the generated prefetch effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch variation command processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the latest pending prefetching effect does not occur (result of B1713 is “N”), or when the prefetching effect to be produced is not an effect that starts immediately (result of B1715 is “N”), As it is. The prefetch variable command processing ends.

[Symbol command processing]
Next, details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a symbol command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols in the special figures 1 and 2 changes, the symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a lost symbol, a 2R probability variable hit symbol (2R-A1, etc.) shown in FIG. 27, a 2R normal variable hit symbol (2R-A2, etc.), and a 6R probability variable hit symbol (6R-A1). Etc.), 6R normal big hit symbol (6R-A2 etc.), 16R positive variable big hit symbol (16R-A1 etc.), and 16R normal big hit symbol (16R-A2 etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends. If the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and the symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent is determined. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variable system command of a loss is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable command processing ends.

  If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and determines the effect during the variation. A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous announcement effect (the remaining number of continuous announcement effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

(Variable effect setting processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the fluctuation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described fluctuation command processing (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (the variation that does not enter the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is the variation with no reach (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first-half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, the model code, the special map type, the production mode, and the set value (probability set value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the addresses of the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations increases, and therefore, the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not the variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the variation pattern type is the variation with reach, the effect control device 300 determines the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the set value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. (B2005).

  After steps B2003 and B2005, effect control device 300 performs a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change (before reach) (B2006). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. Subsequently, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, the symbol type, and the set value (probability set value) is set (B2007). The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and a lottery of the notice appearing during the latter half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the lottery probability of the announcement depends on the set value. Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation command (the fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and the main reach content can be known from the fluctuation command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the contents of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Thereafter, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed in accordance with the contents of the fluctuation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, a stray eye is determined in the case of a missing symbol.

  Next, effect control device 300 performs display setting of a variable effect such as a reach effect (B2013), and performs display setting of a notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and, for example, a display for reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure changing this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode based on light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (the board decorating device 46, the frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc., of each LED) determined by the decorative number. .

  In addition, it is possible not only to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the effect contents but also to set the lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decoration light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure change corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special design other than the above-described first to third special designs that fluctuate on the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation related to (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol change is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided other than the display device 41.

[Winning command processing]
Next, the details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit command indicates a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit command indicates a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds of the current big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to fanfare (B2103), and the hit command processing ends. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from a symbol type determined from a symbol command (decorative special figure command corresponding to a stopped symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (result of B2101 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round (B2101). B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is a round command or a small hit opening command, the rendering control device 300 executes a round rendering setting process, and Is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2105, B2106), and the hit-related command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE portion indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit-related command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and the current gaming machine 10 The interval is set in the gaming state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit-related command processing ends. When the big winning opening is opened only once with a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round, there is no interval command.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (result of B2107 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit-related command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate ending (result of B2110 is "N"), effect control device 300 terminates the hit command without executing any processing. I do.

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuating display game that fluctuates and displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, winning in the starting winning opening) (for example, the first special figure fluctuating display section 51). Alternatively, a game control means (game control device 100) that can be displayed on the second special figure change display section 52) is provided, and when the stop result of the change display game is a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. Let it. The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) can change the setting relating to the game condition (or the setting relating to the game) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which setting can be changed when power is supplied to the gaming machine 10, and can be used when power is cut off before shifting to the setting variable state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (setting is being changed), a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10 indicates that the setting is being changed or that the gaming machine 10 (For example, a variable display game) can be indicated. In the variable setting state, the state of the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned off is maintained, and the normal display (outlier design, big hit design) or the like at the time of change stop is displayed on the display for the special figure change display game. Therefore, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly recognize that the game can be played.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display, on the light-emitting unit (for example, the LED lamps D1 and D2), a variable display game in which the identification information is displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. . The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may cause all the light emitting units of the display device to blink in a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying an unusual display on the display device (collective display device 50), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is not possible to play a game. .

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information indicating the setting variable state in the setting variable state (during setting change) on the display unit (for example, the first special figure variation display). (FIG. 34B).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a display different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game, it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which it is impossible to play a game.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the display unit (for example, the first special figure change display unit 51 and the second special figure change display unit 52) in the setting variable state (setting is being changed). ) May be turned off (FIG. 34D).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), a display different from the normal display (a display different from when the fluctuation display game is stopped) is performed on the display unit for the fluctuation display game, so that the gaming machine 10 cannot play the game. Something can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, , May be displayed on the first special figure change display unit 51 or the second special figure change display unit 52) (FIG. 34C).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), by displaying a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game, it is possible to suggest from the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. By displaying the stop result (loss result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) from the time the setting is changed, the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game is initialized at the end of the setting change. No need to set value.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  In the second embodiment, when the part identification information (first identification information) of the detachable part (part, member) 510 does not match the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, Is reported as an error.

[Gaming machine parts]
FIG. 46 shows a state in which the removable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10. The parts 510 are assigned electrically readable parts identification information. For example, the part 510 may be a plate-like member on which model information (model logo or the like) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable character constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44. A decorative member having an LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be used. The parts 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 in the game arcade because they are in the way of being carried into the game arcade (game arcade).

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, no problem occurs when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, and therefore, the effect control device 300 includes the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device. An error is notified via 41.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically illustrating a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (A1035, A1045). Effect control device 300 selects and sets model identification information corresponding to the received model designation command (B1301) from the reference table (FIG. 55 described later). Further, effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from parts 510 with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 reports that there is an error as mismatch.

  The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds part identification information. In the identification board 513, the part identification information is set by one or more wires 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied. In FIG. 46, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power (voltage) to the part 510 is supplied from, for example, the effect control device 300 or the power supply device 400 when the part 510 is attached.

  In FIG. 47, a plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are respectively connected to predetermined terminals among a plurality (eight) of terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. In this manner, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set as a bit of a value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is set to a bit of a value “0”, for example, “01111100”. Can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned with parts identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ² C).

  FIG. 48 shows another example of the identification board 513. In FIG. 48, the part identification information is set by the DIP switch 521. Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is set to a predetermined voltage or a ground voltage by the DIP switch 521, and each of the bits (“1” or “1”) of the part identification information is connected to a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. "0") is input. In the example of FIG. 48, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 where the DIP switch 521 is turned on has the ground voltage (bit of a value “0”), and is connected to the wiring 519 where the DIP switch 521 is OFF. Terminal has a predetermined voltage (bit of value “1”).

[Parallel-serial converter]
FIG. 49 shows a configuration of the parallel / serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel / serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel / serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 has a configuration of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC including a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF). The parallel / serial conversion unit 516 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and performs serial communication (here, I ² C). (Communication) to the effect control device 300 via the connection line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a for I ² C communication, and inputs a clock signal for a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

  The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is captured by a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and is sequentially output as serial data from the left-most D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of the serial data is completed in eight clocks after the parallel data is captured.

[First Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 50 shows a first modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is an input I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) instead of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC. The input I ² CI / O expander 815 inputs the part identification information input from the ports 0 to 7 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. Filter 833, a bus controller 834, and a reset signal generation circuit 839. Further, a bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by another I ² CI / O expander 815 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself are connected. A self-occupied WDT 841 for determining whether or not the line SDA is occupied is provided.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication on the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

  The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (here, a response signal, address data, or the like) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

  The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (here, part identification information or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  As the transistor 830, a field-effect transistor (FET) is used to suppress power consumption. The gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R. And the source is grounded.

  When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information or the like) to the master IC 300a from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 to allow current to flow between the drain and source of the transistor 830. Apply the value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

  The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise of data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the data from which noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, it is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, an address for resetting the I ² CI / O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address part composed of upper three bits and a variable address part composed of lower five bits. The fixed address portion has a predetermined value (for example, “110”) set in advance, and cannot be changed by the I ² CI / O expander 815.

The variable address section includes a 4-bit I ² CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and a write request whether the data is a read request. And 1-bit R / W identification data indicating whether In the input I ² CI / O expander 815, “1” is generally registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. The SDA outputs data (part identification information) to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage (here, five) of eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is connected to a predetermined voltage by connecting a plurality of wirings 519. Is applied. Accordingly, 8-bit parts identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input to the bus controller 834 via the eight ports 0 to 7 as parallel data. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of “1”, and the other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits having a value of “0”.

Further, the bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the reset address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. The data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized.

  Further, after the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH reaches eight times and the eighth bit data (part identification information) is output by the bus controller 834, the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH. When changed to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal to the bus controller 834 from the connection line SDA. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes again from HIGH to LOW, the connection line SDA is opened. In other words, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH becomes nine.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is connected to a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a RESET terminal that receives a reset signal from the outside.

When the power is turned on to the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the voltage rises to a predetermined value, the reset signal generating circuit 839 generates a reset signal, and inputs the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834 to initialize the reset signal. Become

  Therefore, when the harness is removed, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored, and the reset signal generation circuit 839 outputs a reset signal. Become. Note that a bundle of the connection line Vcc, the connection line SDA, the connection line SCL, the ground line GND, and the like for supplying logic power is called a harness.

The bus monitor WDT 840 is used to detect that another I ² CI / O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitor WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the connection line SDA is occupied, the bus monitor WDT 840 activates its own reset signal generation circuit 839 to operate the I ² CI / O EX. The panda 815 is initialized.

The self-occupancy WDT 841 is used to detect the occupation of the connection line SDA by itself (I ² CI / O expander 815). When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal in the reset signal generation circuit 839 to initialize the I ² CI / O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 51 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-serial conversion IC but an output I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). In the second modification, the part 510 includes an effect device and can execute an effect. The effect device is, for example, a decorative device such as an LED (light emitting unit), but may be a movable accessory.

The output I ² CI / O expander 815 outputs an output state of an effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300. Here, the light emission state) is controlled via output ports 0 to 15. Note that the I ² CI / O expander 815 uses the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 as part identification information and inputs it to the master IC 300 a of the effect control device 300.

^I 2 CI / O expander 815 for output to the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 for input (Fig. 50), the output side of the output setting register 835, the output controller ^836, I 2 CI / O expander 815 A driver 837 connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) and transistors 838A to 838P connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, a description of the same configuration as that of the input I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 50) will be appropriately omitted.

  The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise of data (presentation control data, response signal, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

  The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (here, part identification information, a response signal, or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  The driver 832 can operate the transistor 830 at the gate of the transistor 830 to flow a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information, a response signal, or the like) from the connection line SDA. Apply the value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. The SDA outputs data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) to the master IC 300a. The part identification information to be output to the master IC 300a is the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 as described above, or separately set identification information different from the unique address (first modified example). As an example, the setting is made via a port or stored in a storage unit (memory)). It is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a. When the effect control device 300 receives the reply signal from the bus controller 834, the effect controller 300 recognizes the address of the transmitted data as the part identification information. May be configured.

  Further, the bus controller 834 changes the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH to eight times, and takes in the effect control data of the eighth bit from the connection line SDA, and then changes the signal level of the connection line SCL. When the signal changes from HIGH to LOW, a response signal is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes again from HIGH to LOW, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of times the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH becomes 9 times.

In the output setting register 835, the operation mode of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the output states of the ports 0 to 15 are set. When the bus controller 834 takes in the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 sets the current to flow through all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that it does not exist.

  The output controller 836 supplies a current to the effect devices (here, LEDs and light emitting units) connected to the ports 0 to 15 via the port driver 837 based on the data set in the output setting register 835 ( The output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device is actually controlled by the lighting data output). When the bus controller 834 takes in the effect control data from the connection line SDA, the output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data.

  That is, based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, the output state is set in the output setting register 835, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each of the ports 0 to 15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

  When a current flows through a port, the driver 837 applies a voltage at which the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the current flowing port can operate to the transistors.

  The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to a port terminal connected to a connection line to which a voltage for operating the effect device is applied, and the source is grounded.

  When the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power supply is applied to the source grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. When the current flows to the port, the output state of the effect device (here, an LED) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

[Third Modification Example of Identification Board]
FIG. 52 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the third modification, the parallel-to-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and a predetermined voltage is input from the plurality of wirings 519 as 8-bit parts identification information (for example, “01111100”) provided in the effect control device 300. The data is directly input to the port 300b (ports 0 to 7). The part identification information input to the input port 300b is taken into the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the data bus 340. A predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit of a value “1”, and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to bits of a value “0”.

  Then, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies the mismatch as an error. Execute the processing to be performed.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a main process (main program) according to the second embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (the main control microcomputer 311) when the game machine 10 is powered on (restored).

  The main processing of the second embodiment is obtained by adding a part collation processing (B5000) to the main processing of FIG. 36, and the other processing is the same as that of FIG. Is omitted.

  In the part collation processing, the part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared. If the information does not match, a warning is issued by an error notification. In the present embodiment, the part collation processing (B5000) is executed after the received command check processing (B0014).

  The parts collation processing (B5000) is first executed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and thereafter is repeatedly executed by a loop processing from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Part matching process]
Next, details of the part collation processing (B5000) in the main processing (FIG. 53) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the part collation processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first updates -1 unless the collation time timer (time measuring means) is 0 (B5001). The collation time timer determines the collation timing or collation time interval at which the part identification information is read and collated (compared) with the model identification information. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). If the collation time timer is not 0 (result of B5002 is "N"), it is not the collation timing, and the part collation processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (result of B5002 is “Y”), effect controller 300 reads the part identification information from part 510 because it is the collation timing (B5003). Then, the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (collated) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

  The effect control device 300 stores a reference table of FIG. 55 in a memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 55, the model designation command is associated with the model identification information. In this way, effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the type of gaming machine.

  Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). If the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error is notified that the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it is notified that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not match (correspond to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may execute an error notification (warning) by generating a sound from the speakers 19a and 19b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Further, here, the effect control device 300 may notify the correct model compatible with (corresponding to) the part 510 together with the error notification with reference to the reference table in FIG. The correct model is a model having the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

  Subsequently, effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the part collation processing. Therefore, the part identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (collated) every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses from the time when the power is turned on for the first time. The initial value of the matching time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited thereto.

  On the other hand, when the part identification information and the model identification information match (result of B5005 is “Y”), effect controller 300 is attached to the correct model in which part 510 conforms to (corresponds to) part 510. Without reporting the error, the initial value of the collation time timer is set (B5007), and the part collation processing ends.

  By the above-described parts collation processing, for example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46 (B)), the model identification information (eg, “01111100”) and the part identification information (For example, “01111101”) do not match, and an error notification is executed. Along with the error notification, a correct model (model B) compatible with the part 510B may be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46A), the model identification information (eg, “01111100”) and the part identification information (eg, “01111100”) ) Match, no error notification is performed.

  As a modification, the effect control device 300 does not store the reference table of FIG. 55 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321), and stores only the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model. May do it. Also in this case, the effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the held model identification information, and compares the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). ) Is mismatched, an error is reported as a mismatch.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition), Effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which first identification information (part identification information) that is electrically readable is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the component, compares it with the second identification information, and outputs the first identification information (part identification). (Information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, it is notified that they do not match.

  Therefore, even when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached, it is possible to appropriately notify. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 in which a component (part 510) is erroneously attached in the amusement arcade (game arcade) from operating.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, at least when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the effect control unit reads the first identification information of the component (part 510), compares the first identification information with the second identification information, When the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, it notifies that they do not match. Therefore, even when the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to reliably and early prevent the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which a component (part 510) has been mistakenly mounted in the amusement arcade (game store).

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the effect control unit receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control unit and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. Second identification information (model identification information) is selected from a table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, when a wrong part (part 510) is attached to various models of the gaming machine 10, this can be notified. In addition, a correct model to which a wrong component is to be attached can be notified.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that it is simple. First identification information can be set.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the component (part 510), the first identification information can be set by the dip switch, so that the first identification information can be easily set.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of a probability set value. Note that the fixed display period is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability set value.

[Game control device according to third embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 56, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 according to the third embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 according to the first embodiment, except that the probability set value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated into the state display device 152. It has a shape. That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability set value display device 143 of the first embodiment. In the game control device 100 of the third embodiment, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached separately from the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition state at power-on]
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is turned on (power is restored). Depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

  First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change state) in which the probability set value can be changed is set. Mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clear here, the clear processing of step A1036 is executed, and the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in A1021 of FIG. 5C. Note that in the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in steps A1024 and A1028 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Further, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112, not the set value change switch 102, is on.

  Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the mode shifts to a setting check state (setting check mode) in which the probability set value can be checked. The transition to the setting confirmation state can be executed in steps A2504 to A2508 of the probability setting value confirmation processing (FIG. 11) during the timer interruption processing after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035).

  If the setting key switch 93 is turned off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1042 to 1045 is executed, and FIG. As shown in (1), the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. In the RAM clear, the clear area # 3 may be specified as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

  If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the probability set value changing process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a probability set value changing process according to the third embodiment.

  The probability set value changing process of the third embodiment is different from the probability set value changing process of FIG. 10 in that the positions of the processes of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed, and the processes of steps A2411, A2413 are deleted. The other processes are the same as those in FIG. 10, and thus the same step numbers are assigned and the description is omitted.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off in the process of step A2416 (result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the work probability set value area and saves the value in the probability set value area. (A2412). When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the set value is determined, and values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a probability set value changed flag indicating that the probability set value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability set value change command indicating that the probability set value has been changed. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2415). After that, the processes in steps A2417 to A2421 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and proceeds to the process in step A1049. Here, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is saved in the probability set value display area in step A2420, so that the determined probability set value is displayed in the state display device 152 in which the probability set value display device 143 is incorporated. Can be displayed.

[Process when receiving set value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the setting value reception processing (B1324) in the one-shot command processing will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a setting value reception process according to the third embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (result of B5201 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is ended.

  If the received command is a normal command (result of B5201 is “Y”), effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current date and time (current time) from RTC 338 (or the timer for time) (B5202). ), It is determined whether or not the received command is a setting value information command at the end of the setting change (B5203). The setting value information command at the time of the end of the setting change is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the command of the end of the probability setting change in step A2421 of the probability setting value changing process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is ended.

  If the received command is the set value information command at the time of completion of the setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), effect control device 300 associates the set value with the current date and time (current time) and stores it in memory. (B5204), and terminates the process upon receiving the set value. The memory here is an FeRAM 323 that can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied.

  If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change, that is, if the received command is the setting value information command at the time of restoration from power failure (A1035) or the setting value information command at the time of RAM initialization (A1045), The result of B5203 may be “N”), and the set value (probability set value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the segment LED editing process according to the third embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50 are provided. The setting related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the section 58, the third game state display section 59, and the round display section 60 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the segment LED editing process, in addition to the variable display game, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variable display unit 53 for the general figure variable display game are controlled to emit light. In this case, the light emission control (extinguishing control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 is executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold indicators 54-56. May do it. In the variation display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 to emit light (flash) is executed in a symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

  The game control device 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9202). If the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the ordinary figure reserved number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the general figure reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the general figure reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the general figure reservation display 56 (lamp D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both the tables 1 and 2 for displaying the number of ordinary drawings, so that the ordinary display indicator 56 does not blink. Since the display data of the figure reservation number display table 1 and the display data of the general figure reservation number display table 2 are different, the general figure reservation display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9206). If it is the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 reservation The number display table 2 is set (A9208), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reservation display 54 (lamp D11, D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output ON timing (A9210). If it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 reservation The number display table 2 is set (A9212), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reservation display 55 (lamp D13, D14) (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (the lamps D3 to D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And saves it in the segment area of the round display section 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which display modes on the second game state display unit 58 (ramp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), and the like are defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is obtained and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (the lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is obtained and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process ends.

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2 with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The game machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the state display device 152 displays an undetermined probability set value (undetermined value) (probability set value display (undetermined value)). In the probability set value display (undetermined value) of the status display device 152, the undetermined probability set value is blinkingly displayed. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. The collective display device 50 (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth design), and the decoration device are kept off. The decoration device includes a frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b, a board decoration device 46 such as the upper effect unit 40c, and a decoration light emitting unit (LED). Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of a light-off state, or only a light-emitting unit other than a specific color may be turned off.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3, the gaming machine state changes to a playable state in which a game can be played, and the determined probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (second display device). (Probability setting value display (determined value)). In the probability set value display (determined value) of the state display device 152, the determined probability set value is lit and displayed. When the gaming machine state is the gaming state, the setting value cannot be changed or confirmed. In addition, in response to the state of being able to play at time x3, identification information of a lost symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and / or the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 (this special feature). The display 41 displays a customer waiting demonstration. In addition, the display part (lamp D3-D18) other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display apparatus 50 may blink and display the customer waiting display. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device display normally. In addition, when the probability set value is determined at the time x3, notification that the probability set value is determined may be performed by sound or voice.

  Time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3. At time x4, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability set value display, starts the all-blinking display, and repeatedly performs the all-off display and the all-on display of all the segments at predetermined time intervals. . Note that the full blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking display of the display unit of the collective display device 50 (the above-described customer waiting display). Synchronization may be performed at the same blink cycle.

  The time x4 is not limited to the time when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from the time x3, and is not limited to when the front frame 12 (body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. As described above, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the gaming state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined by the state display device 152 can be confirmed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). Even if the user does not enter the setting confirmation mode again later, the determined setting values can be viewed, and the work efficiency of the game arcade manager can be improved.

  Time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the all-blinking display and starts the performance display (display of the accessory ratio), so that the accessory ratio is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the information about the accessory ratio, the state display device 152 may display information about the payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and a base value (the payout rate in the normal game state) (payout) Rate display, discharge ball number display, base value display). Note that the accessory ratio and the payout ratio (including the base value) are derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning as described above, and serve as performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. Then, the status display device 152 can execute performance display for displaying performance information.

  Note that the probability set value display (undetermined value) from time x2 is blinking display, and the probability set value display (determined value) of the status display device 152 from time x3 is lit display. The display may be switched so that the probability set value display (undetermined value) is lit and the probability set value display (determined value) is flashed.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 62, together with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the effect control device 300 receives the command during the change of the probability setting (A1041), and displays the setting change display indicating that the setting is being changed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off during the setting change. In addition, the effect control device 300 may perform notification that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting change display 721.

  In FIG. 62 (c), a customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting change. When the game can be played, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed normally, and a part of the upper effect unit 40c is turned on or off according to the customer waiting demonstration as shown in black in FIG. . As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) for performing the variable display (flashing) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the number of start memories of each special symbol variable display game. Since it is composed of a notification lamp display unit 3-6 (LED), it is turned off in the normal display (light-off display), but a part of it may be turned on or off in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration.

  FIG. 62 (S) shows the display when the special-figure change display game (change display game) is started by the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206), and the customer waiting demonstration ends. 6 is a display screen of the device 41. The customer waiting demonstration screen 722 shown in FIG. 62 (h) is not displayed, and the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 610 (the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C). . Further, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or off in accordance with the special figure variable display game. In the reserved digesting area 640, a special figure varying display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digesting pending display) corresponding to the running (digesting) special figure varying display game is displayed. The hold display unit 630 displays the first start memory and the second start memory that are on hold. For example, when the special figure change display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, as shown in FIG. 62 (S), there is no held first start memory or second start memory in the hold display unit 630. .

[Modified example of timing chart of fixed display period of probability set value at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a description will be given of a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state). FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 63, 64, 66, and 67, description overlapping with FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

  As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the state of the gaming machine is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts to blink completely.

  Then, at a time x4 'at which a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the full blinking to the probability set value display (determined value). After switching the display to the probability set value display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the display of the ratio of the accessory and the display of the payout ratio) at a time x5 ′ after a lapse of a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds). Then, the accessory ratio is displayed. In this way, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the state display device 152 is turned on and off completely in response to the setting change mode being set to the game-enabled state, thereby confirming that the setting has been determined. Can be clearly shown to others. After that, since the set value determined by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), the game arcade manager can confirm the set value as it is, thereby improving work efficiency. Can be.

  In addition, similarly to FIG. 61, after the probability set value is displayed, the performance display may be started after the entire blinking is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5 '.

[Second Modification of Timing Chart for Probable Display Period of Probability Set Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state). FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the playable state, the state display device 152 starts displaying the probability set value.

  Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been determined, as described later with reference to FIG. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the display of the ratio of the active material and the display of the payout ratio) at a time x5 after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec), and displays the ratio of the active material. indicate.

  Note that at time x3, before performing the probability set value display (determined value) on the state display device 152, it is also possible to perform full blinking or notification display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Also, at time x3, if the notification display is performed before the probability set value display (determined value) is performed on the state display device 152, from time x4 to time x5 after the probability set value display (determined value). All blinking may be performed instead of performing notification display.

[Display mode when setting of status display device is changed]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode when the setting of the status display device 152 is changed according to the second modification of the third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 65A shows a display mode of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off until time x2 in FIG. 64. 8 segments) are all turned off.

  FIG. 65 (b) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability set value display (undetermined value, determined value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4. The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) is displayed in the digit 3, and seven segments (digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0) other than the digit 3 are turned off. Note that the current probability set value (for example, “6”) displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the state display device 152 blinks in the probability set value display (undetermined value) from time x2 to time x3, In the probability set value display (determined value) from x3 to time x4, the display is turned on.

  FIG. 65C shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification display is performed from the time x4 to the time x5. Upper and lower bars indicating that the probability set value has been determined are displayed in digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152. Note that the notification display displayed in digits 0 to 3 of the state display device 152 is not limited to the display using the upper and lower bars, but may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability setting value and the performance display.

  FIG. 65D shows a display mode of the status display device 152 in which the performance is displayed after the time x5. As shown in FIG. 65 (d), the state display device 152 displays a payout rate (for example, “b1.35”) for the latest predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls as a performance display. . The state display device 152 may display the overall payout ratio (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102), the base value, and the accessory ratio from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present. The display may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 seconds).

[Third Modification of Timing Chart of Probable Display Period of Probability Set Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a description will be given of a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state). FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing a third modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, when the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206) is performed at time x4 ″, the batch display is performed. In the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50, the special figure display (display of the identification information) starts to fluctuate from the non-displayed symbols, and the special figure fluctuating display game (fluctuating display) Game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration ends, and the decoration special figure change display game (change display game) starts. In response to the start of the special figure change display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 displays the special figure change display game (fluctuation display) using the fourth symbol. Game) and the number of holdings are started, and an effect corresponding display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variable display game is performed on the decoration device.

  Then, at a time x5 ″ at which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4 ″, the status display device 152 stops blinking completely and starts a performance display (a display of an accessory ratio or a display of a payout ratio). I do. In this way, by starting all-blinking and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variable display game without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse, information on the game can be displayed early. .

  Note that the state display device 152 performs the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206), that is, the normal change winning device 37 or the starting game winning prize port 36. Not only the mode in which the full blinking is started when there is, but also the full blinking may be started in the case where a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34. . Also, as in the example in FIG. 61 described above, the full blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth Modification of Timing Chart for Probable Display Period of Probability Set Value at Setting Change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of a fourth modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is changed (setting change mode, setting variable state). FIG. 67A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the state of the gaming machine is changed to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modification start blinking all. At this time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking periods of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are also set to be the same as the blinking period of the collective display device 50. Then, the blink timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blink timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the collective display device 50. When the probability display value is displayed by blinking the status display device 152, the blinking of the status display device 152 is controlled using a blink control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 is controlled. The blink timing and the blink timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

  The full blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed on all display units (light emitting units, LED lamps D1 to D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, or the display unit 51 for the special figure change display game. , 52 (LED lamps D1, D2) only. Alternatively, all the blinking display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by LED lamps (for example, the LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure change display game.

  Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3, the state of the gaming machine is changed from the setting change mode to a playable state, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device end all blinking. At time x3, the identification information of the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the collective display device 50 (this special figure display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. Further, the determined probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display), and the display during the setting change ends on the display screen of the display device 41, and the customer waiting demonstration is started.

  Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) elapses from time x3 and time x5 ″ ′ is reached, the state display device 152 ends the probability set value display (determined value), and displays the performance (displays the accessory ratio display). And the payout rate display). As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modified example, after the probability set value display (determined value) is completed, all the blinks are omitted, and the performance display (the display of the ratio of the useful objects and the display of the payout rate) is immediately performed. Therefore, the game arcade manager can check the payout rate or the like at an early stage after the setting is changed. At time x5 ′ ″, a special figure variation display game (variation display game) starts on the collective display device 50 and the display device 41, and a special figure variation display game (fourth design) on the lamp display device 80. (Variable display game) and the number of holdings are displayed, and a display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variable display game is performed on the decoration device (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of the confirmation display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the timing of the probability display set value confirming display period at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 68 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value when the setting is determined according to the third embodiment.

  After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x12 with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The game machine state) is set to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the determined probability set value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display). Then, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 69 described later (stop symbol display). When the state of the gaming machine is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device are in a fully lit state in which, for example, all the segments and all the LEDs are lit (a part of the lit state). May be). In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50 may display a stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure change display game. When the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 is the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variable display game.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x13, the state of the gaming machine is changed from the setting confirmation mode to a playable state, and the state display device 152 displays a performance display (an accessory ratio display or a payout ratio display). You. In addition, in response to the gaming machine state being changed to the gaming enabled state at time x13, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) is displayed as the special figure on the collective display device 50 ( This special map display (previous display pattern)). Then, a customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are displayed normally. As described above, when switching from the setting confirmation state to the game possible state, the performance information can be immediately displayed on the status display device 152 (second display device) as a performance display, thereby improving the work efficiency of the game arcade manager. Can be improved.

  Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at the time x13, as shown in the timing chart at the time of setting change shown in FIG. 5 sec) All blinks may be performed. As described above, by displaying a display (all blinking display) in a mode different from the probability set value and the performance display on the state display device 152 between the setting confirmation mode and the game possible state, the game arcade manager can It becomes easier to more reliably grasp that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 69, together with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. In the following description of FIGS. 69 and 71, description overlapping with FIG. 62 will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (se), when the effect control device 300 receives the command of the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327), the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are all turned on. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have different light emission modes during the setting confirmation from those during the setting change (FIG. 62). In addition, the effect control device 300 may perform notification (by sound or the like) indicating that the setting is being confirmed together with the full lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, the stop symbol (stop result) of the identification information of the last special figure change display game is displayed, and the display mode is such that it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

  In FIG. 69 (S), a customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the state where the game can be played after the setting is confirmed. When the game can be played, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c display the normal display.

  FIG. 69 (T) shows the case where the customer waiting demonstration ends and the special figure change display game (change display game) is started by the special figure 2 change start processing (A3202) or the special figure 1 change start processing (A3206). 6 is a display screen of the display device 41. As in FIG. 62 (S), the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is not displayed, the first decorations A to C are displayed in the variable display area 620 in a variable manner, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are changed in the special figure. This is an effect mode of lighting or blinking in accordance with the display game.

[Modified example of timing chart for confirmation display period of probability set value at setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a description will be given of a modification example of the timing of the probability display value confirmation display period at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state). FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 70, description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

  As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at the time x12, the gaming machine state switches to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modification, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a setting confirmation display 723 that shows the setting history of the probability setting value so far, for example, as described later with reference to FIG. , The display mode is such that the user can confirm that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)). In addition, the set value that has been determined is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability set value display (determined value)), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start blinking fully. The collective display device 50 is kept off. The setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be any display mode that indicates that the setting is being confirmed. For example, the fact that the setting is being confirmed may be displayed using characters or the like. In addition to the setting confirmation display, the fact that the setting is being confirmed may be notified by sound or voice.

  Thereafter, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x13, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the game possible state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start customer waiting demo. In response to the gaming machine state being changed to the gaming enabled state at time x13, the state display device 152 displays the performance display (the display of the ratio of the usefulness and the payout ratio), and the batch display device 50 displays the immediately preceding ( The symbol (identification information) displayed at the time of power-off is displayed as the special symbol (the special symbol display (the immediately preceding symbol)). Further, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device display normally.

[Example of display screen of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (se '), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command of the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display in which the setting history of the probability setting value so far can be listed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (se '), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, and the like are displayed in a list. You. As described with reference to FIG. 59, each time the effect control device 300 receives the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), the setting value and the setting change date and time when the setting value is determined (The date and time of the end of the setting change) and store it in the FeRAM 323 (B5204). Therefore, the effect control device 300 displays the setting history of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation display 723 by reading the setting value and the setting change date and time from the FeRAM 323. The lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are fully blinked during the setting confirmation mode.

  In FIG. 71 (S '), a customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally Display.

  FIG. 71 (ta ′) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration has ended and the special figure change display game (change display game) has started, as in FIGS. 62 (su) and 69 (ta). It is. On the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is not displayed, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed in the special figure variable display game. Is turned on or blinked according to the effect.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (the special figure variable display game) for displaying the identification information (the identification symbol, the present special figure) in a variable manner is a special result (the big hit result mode, the big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when the special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in the gaming area 32 and has a winning area (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39) in which a game ball can be awarded. When a ball wins a winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out a number of winning balls determined for each winning area, and a first display device (batch display) capable of displaying a display related to a game. Device 50), setting change means (setting change device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning A second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information (principal agent ratio, payout rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total payout rate, base value) derived based on the number. 152). The control unit changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, a light-off display) in response to the setting change unit changing the setting value to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). , All blinking display), and in response to the setting change unit changing the setting value from the setting change state to a playable state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the set value determined on the second display device is displayed for a predetermined period (predetermined time, For example, display can be performed for 2 to 3 seconds).

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the game possible state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time). Work efficiency of the place manager can be improved.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) changes the setting from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game possible state, The set value determined on the display device (status display device 152) is used as a signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when detecting a game ball that has won the normal prize winning device 37, the starting prize port 36 or the general prize port 35, The signal is displayed until a signal notifying that a game ball has passed through the starting gate 34, a signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, and a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 are detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the performance information is displayed when a signal related to the game is detected, the game arcade manager can check the performance information immediately after the setting change.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (the special figure variable display game) for displaying the identification information (the identification symbol, the present special figure) in a variable manner is a special result (the big hit result mode, the big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state for giving a game value to a player when the special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in the gaming area 32 and has a winning area (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39) in which a game ball can be awarded. When a ball wins a winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out a number of winning balls determined for each winning area, and a first display device (batch display) capable of displaying a display related to a game. Device 50), setting check means (setting key switch 92, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of checking setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and prize balls obtained by winning A second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information (principal agent ratio, payout rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total payout rate, base value) derived based on the number. 152). The control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, all lighting display, previous time, Display of a stop symbol of the identification information of the special figure change display game), and the second display device displays the performance information in response to the change from the setting check state to the playable state in which the setting value cannot be checked by the setting checking means. Can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, since the performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device when the setting value is switched from the setting confirmation state to the game possible state where the setting value cannot be confirmed. Work efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a setting change unit (setting change unit) capable of changing a set value (set value, probability set value) when set in a set change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The device 42 further includes a RAM initialization switch 112). The control means (game control device 100) displays the first display device (collective display device 50) when the setting is changed to the setting change state (probability set value display) in response to the setting confirmation state. Or a mode different from the display related to the game (for example, all-lit display). According to such a gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, so that the game arcade manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (a special figure variable display game), and a display of the effect on the third display device. Effect control means (effect control device 300) that can control the The effect control means displays a history of setting changes on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first display device (the collective display device 50) is not in a display mode in which it is understood that the setting is confirmed, the game arcade manager can perform the setting from the third display device. It can be seen that the state is the confirmation state, and the setting history can be confirmed.

  The control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) to the immediately preceding variable display game (special figure variation) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The display result (display symbols, identification information) of the display game is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, so that the game arcade manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to suppress a processing load and a data amount correspondingly.

  The control unit (game control device 100) displays the performance information (the ratio of the character, the latest information) on the second display device (the status display device 152) in response to the game being enabled from the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation mode). (The payout rate, the total payout rate, and the base value) for the predetermined number of ejected balls. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game arcade manager can immediately check the performance information by changing from the setting confirmation state to the game possible state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

  The control means (game control device 100) changes the display of the second display device (status display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the game being enabled from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The display (probability setting value display) at the time or the display of performance information (principal agent ratio, the payout rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, the overall payout rate, and the base value). After changing the display of the display device to a different mode, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display in a mode different from these displays is displayed on the second display device immediately after the gaming state, the game arcade manager switches to the gaming state. It becomes easier to grasp the facts.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  FIG. 72 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a view illustrating addresses of input ports in the game control device 100 according to the fourth embodiment and signals input to each input port.

  The game control system in the fourth embodiment is basically the same as that in the third embodiment (FIG. 56), but there are some differences as described below.

  In the third embodiment, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the RAM initialization switch 112 are all connected to the same input port (input port 123) (FIG. 56).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72, in the fourth embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the input port 123, and the setting value change switch 102 and the setting key switch 93 are connected to the input port 124. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112, the setting value change switch 102, and the setting key switch 93 are different from the third embodiment in that they are connected to different input ports.

  As described above, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting variable state (see FIG. 57).

  At that time, in the third embodiment, the game microcomputer 111 configuring the game control device 100 specifies the address of the input port 123, and outputs the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123 and the setting key switch 93. The ON signal has been obtained.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 acquires the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123 by designating the address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123, and outputs the address of the input port 124. (82H, FIG. 73) is specified and the ON signal of the setting key switch 93 is obtained from the input port 124.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, the input ports (122, 123, and 124) from which the above-described ON signal is obtained may be different from each other. For example, the gaming microcomputer 111 does not need to specify the address (82H, FIG. 73) of the input port 124 to obtain the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, but obtains the ON signal of the setting key switch 93. The address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123 is not designated.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the input port 122 (address: 80H (hexadecimal notation)), the input port 123 (address: 81H (hexadecimal notation)), and the input port 124 (address: H82 (hexadecimal notation)) They have different addresses.

  Each input port is assigned so that various signals (ON signal, OFF signal) are input. In the same input port, various signals can be identified by the positions of the bits (b0-b6). By increasing or decreasing the number of bits, the number of signals that can be connected to one input port can be increased or decreased.

  In the following, regarding the presence / absence of a signal abnormality and the presence / absence of a switch operation, a negative logic (for example, an abnormality or operation is performed when a signal is off) and a positive logic (for an abnormality or operation is performed when a signal is on). Are mixed, but may be unified to either negative logic or positive logic.

  The input port 122 (80H) includes, for example, a frame radio wave illegal signal (b0), a payout busy signal (b1), a payout abnormal status signal (b2), a shot ball out switch signal (b3), an overflow switch signal (b4), The touch switch signal (b5) and the out ball detection switch signal (b6) are input. Various signals including those described later are described in the first embodiment.

  When the frame radio wave illegal signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates that a frame radio error has occurred, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality). I have.

  If the payout busy signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the payout command transmission is prohibited, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the payout command can be transmitted.

  If the payout abnormality status signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that there is an abnormality in payout, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality).

  If the shot ball out switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the shot ball is out, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality). .

  When the overflow switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates an overflow state, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality).

  If the touch switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the operation handle 24 (FIG. 3) is touched, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is not touched. I have.

  The out ball detection switch signal (b6) indicates that an out ball has been detected if it is on (High: 1), and indicates that no out ball has been detected if it is off (Low: 0). I have. Note that a configuration for detecting a shooting sphere may be applied instead of the configuration for detecting an out sphere.

  The input port 123 (81H) includes, for example, a panel radio wave sensor signal (b0), an abnormality detection signal (b1), a magnetic sensor signal (b2), a glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3), and a body frame opening detection switch signal ( b4), a RAM initialization switch signal (b5) and a power failure monitoring signal (b6) are input.

  When the panel radio wave sensor signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a panel radio error has occurred.

  If the abnormality detection signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an abnormality related to the abnormality detection signal (first embodiment) has occurred, and if it is off (Low: 0), it is normal (no abnormality). Is shown.

  If the magnetic sensor signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a magnetic error has occurred. (FIG. 72) indicates that detection has been performed.

  The glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3) indicates that the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (FIG. 72) has detected that the glass frame 15 (FIG. 1) is in the closed state if it is on (High: 1). , Off (Low: 0) indicates that the open state is detected.

  If the body frame opening detection switch signal (b4) is ON (High: 1), the front frame opening detection switch 64 (FIG. 72) detects that the body frame (the front frame 12, FIG. 1) is closed. If it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the open state is detected.

  If the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (not pressed), and if it is off (Low: 0), it is on (Low: 0). (Pressed down) state (setting changeable transition state).

  If the power failure monitoring signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a power failure has occurred.

  The input port 124 (82H) includes, for example, a gate switch signal (b0), a winning opening switch signal (b1), a winning opening switch signal (b2), a starting opening 1 switch signal (b3), and a starting opening 2 switch signal ( b4), a set value change switch signal (b5) and a set key switch signal (b6) are input.

  If the gate switch signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the gate switch 34a (FIG. 72) has detected a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 (FIG. 2), and is off (Low: If it is 0), it indicates that detection is not performed.

  If the winning opening switch signal (b1) is ON (High: 1), it indicates that the gaming ball having won the general winning opening 35 (FIG. 2) is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (FIG. 72), and OFF (Low). : 0) indicates that no detection has been performed.

  If the special winning opening switch signal (b2) is ON (High: 1), the game ball that has won the special winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is switched to the special winning opening switch 39a (count switch 39a) (FIG. 72). It indicates that it has been detected, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not been detected.

  If the starting port 1 switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the starting port 1 switch 36a has detected that a game ball has won the starting winning port 36, and is off (Low: 0). If there is, it indicates that it has not been detected.

  If the starting port 2 switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the starting port 2 switch 37a has detected that a game ball has won the normal variable winning device 37, and is off (Low: 0). If it is, it indicates that no detection has been made.

  If the set value change switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the set value change switch 102 is off (not pressed), and if it is off (Low: 0), it is on (Low: 0). (Pressed down) state.

  When the setting key switch signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (setting change prohibited state), and when it is off (Low: 0), it is in the on state (setting). Change permitted state).

  Here, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the setting key switch signal (b6) input to the input port 124 is on (Low: 0) (setting change allowable state), the input to the input port 123 is performed. When the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is turned on (Low: 0), the state changes to a setting changeable state, and the set value can be changed by operating the set value change switch 102.

  Among the above signals, a signal related to the setting change includes a setting value change switch signal input to the input port 124, a setting key switch signal input to the input port 124, and a RAM initialization switch signal input to the input port 123. However, each signal can be arbitrarily input to any of the input port 122, the input port 123, and the input port 124.

  However, if the switch is connected so that the set value change switch signal, the set key switch signal, and the RAM initialization switch signal are input to the same input port, the same setting is performed when a malicious player, etc. There is a possibility that the injustice may be easily performed only by modifying the input port.

  Therefore, at least one of the set value change switch signal (set value change switch 102), the set key switch signal (set key switch 93), and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to another input port. It is preferable to design to input to

  Alternatively, it is preferable that the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) are designed to be input to different input ports.

  It is also preferable that the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102) are designed to be input to the same input port. As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame open detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, if the game control device 100 of the fourth embodiment is mounted without wiring from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 to the input port 124, the game machine as a gaming machine having no setting change function can be used. Since the game machine can be operated, the versatility of the game control device 100 can be enhanced.

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes at least two switches (any two of the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the setting value change switch 102), and supports settings related to gaming. Setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, setting value changing switch 102) capable of changing the setting value to be set, and control means (gaming microcomputer 111) capable of controlling the game result based on the setting value And. Signals from the two switches are input to the control means (gaming microcomputer 111) via different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the setting value setting means (the gaming microcomputer 111) in which the setting value according to the setting relating to the game is set, and the setting value setting means (the gaming microcomputer 111) are allowed to change the setting. Setting permission / prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) capable of switching between a state and a setting change prohibition state, and a setting changeable state in which the setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111) is operated by being operated under the setting change permissible state. (RAM initialization switch 112). The setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) are set value setting means (gaming) through different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124). Microcomputer 111).

  According to the above configuration, the switches relating to the setting change (setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93), setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112)) are connected to different input ports, so that a malicious player is Can be prevented from being changed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the setting value setting means (the gaming microcomputer 111) in which the setting value according to the setting relating to the game is set, and the setting value setting means (the gaming microcomputer 111) are permitted to change the setting. A setting permission / prohibition switching means (setting key switch 93) capable of switching between a state and a setting change prohibition state, and a setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) is shifted to a setting changeable state by operating under the setting change permission state. A setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112) to be set and a setting operation means (set value change switch 102) capable of performing an operation for changing the set value to the set value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111). Prepare. The setting permission / refusal switching means (setting key switch 93), the setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102) are set via input ports (input ports 122-124). It is connected to value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111). At least one of the setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93), setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102) is different from the remaining one. It is connected to input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124).

  With the above configuration, at least one of the switches related to the setting change (setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93), setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102)) is provided. Since the input port is connected to another input port, it is possible to prevent a malicious player or the like from changing the settings due to fraud.

  In the fourth embodiment, the setting permission / refusal switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102) are connected to the same input port (input port 124).

  With the above configuration, the setting changeable transition unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame open detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, if the game control means (game control device 100) is mounted without wiring from the setting permission / refusal switching means and the setting operation means to the input port 124, the game machine can be used as a game machine having no setting change function. Since it can be operated, the versatility of the game control means (game control device 100) can be enhanced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as the embodiments from the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components having the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are appropriately omitted. The fifth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that perform setting suggestion effects that indicate setting values under specific conditions. On the other hand, when a hot effect appears, the player has a problem that the launch of the game ball is stopped even in a situation where the hold is stored. In view of this, the fifth embodiment aims to improve the interest of the game by performing an effect in which the suggestion of the set value and the hold are associated with each other.

  FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the number of holds and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect according to the fifth embodiment (FIG. 75A), and the relationship between the number of holds, the set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75B). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74, an LED 36b (production means, lighting means) is arranged in the starting winning opening 36 arranged below the game board 30. The gaming board 30 in FIG. 74 is the same as the gaming board 30 in FIG. 2A except for the LED 36b. The LED 36b is configured, for example, as a part of the board decoration device 46 (FIG. 4), and includes lighting information (information for setting suggestion effect) transmitted from the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311), as described later. A setting suggestion effect for indicating a setting value is performed.

  The LED 36b is, for example, a light-emitting device that can individually drive a light-emitting member (LED) that emits red light, a light-emitting member (LED) that emits white light, and a light-emitting member (LED) that emits blue light. (LED) to emit light.

  It should be noted that the LED 36b can be attached to, for example, the general winning opening 35 and the ordinary variable winning opening device 37 instead of the starting winning opening 36, and the large winning opening LED 39d can be substituted.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (A), the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 shows the relationship between the number of reservations (the first number of stored memories or the second number of stored memories) and the setting suggestion effect occurrence probability. The table is stored in, for example, the RAM 322 (FIG. 4). The table also includes the probability of occurrence in the case of overflow that is greater than the maximum number of start storages (four).

  In addition, the main control microcomputer 311 selects the occurrence probability from the table shown in FIG. 75A based on the number-of-reservations command (decorative-spec- figure-reservation-number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and selects the selected occurrence. A calculation function is also provided for determining whether or not to perform a setting suggestion effect by performing a lottery with a probability.

  When the main control microcomputer 311 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed by winning the lottery, the main control microcomputer 311 transmits the setting suggestion effect information (lighting information) via the board decoration LED control circuit 332 (FIG. 4) to the LED 36b ( It is transmitted to the panel decoration device 46).

  In FIG. 75 (A), the setting is set so that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of reservations increases. For example, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of reservations is zero is 1/500, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of reservations is 1 is 1/300, and the setting probability when the number of reservations is 2 The probability of occurrence of a suggestion effect is 1/100, the probability of setting suggestion effect when the number of reservations is 3 is 1/30, and the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion effect when the number of reservations is 4 is 1/10. The probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of reservations overflows is set to 1/5. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even if a hot effect appears during a game, by accumulating the number of holds, it is possible to provide a pleasure of determining a set value in addition to a pleasure of prefetching. It can enhance interest. In particular, when the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of reservations increases, the motivation to accumulate the number of reservations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  The game control device 100 (FIG. 72) can transmit not only the number-of-holds command but also set value information indicating a set value to the effect control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) of the effect control device 300 turns on the LED 36 b a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) based on the lighting information, and for example, how many times red (other colors may be used) are lighted. , A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value is performed. The setting suggestion effect reflects the setting value and the number of reservations. That is, the lighting probability of red lighting of the LED 36b changes according to the set value and the number of suspensions.

  As shown in FIG. 75B, the main control microcomputer 311 stores, for example, a table showing the relationship between the number of reserved red light lighting probabilities and the set value in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4). Here, in FIG. 75B, the lighting probability is set on the assumption that the larger the set value is, the larger the big hit probability and the small hit probability are, as shown in FIG. 24A.

  The main control microcomputer 311 generates lighting information (setting suggestion effect information) in which the LED 36b lights up 20 times, and in each lighting, emits a signal for lighting one of red lighting, white lighting, and blue lighting in a predetermined lighting. Incorporate with probability. Among them, the lighting probability of red lighting is extracted from the table of FIG. 75 (B) using the information of the set value and the information of the number of holdings transmitted from the game control device 100. For example, if the lighting probability of red lighting is determined to be 20%, the lighting probability of white lighting and the lighting probability of blue lighting can each be 40%.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (B), when the number of suspensions is zero, the setting value 1-3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 20%, and the setting value 4-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. Thus, out of the 20 lightings, the red lighting is turned on four times on average with the set value 1-3, is turned on eight times on the average with the set value 4-6, and any one of the set values 1-3 is set depending on the difference in the average number of lightings. Or any of the set values 4-6.

  When the number of reservations is 1, the setting value 1-2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 10%, the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 20%, and the setting value 4-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. The percentage is assumed. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is turned on twice on average at the set value 1-2, turned on four times on average at the set value 3, and turned on eight times at the set value 4-6. The difference makes it possible to indicate whether it is one of the set values 1-2, the set value 3, or the set value 4-6.

  When the hold number is 2, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. At the value 4-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is set to 40%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is turned on once on average at the set value 1, turned on three times on the set value 2, turned on five times at the set value 3, and turned on eight at the set value 4-6. It turns on twice, and it is possible to indicate whether it is set value 1, set value 2, set value 3 or set value 4-6 based on the difference in the average number of times of lighting. .

  When the hold number is 3, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. The value 4 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 35%, and the set value 5-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is turned on once on average at the set value 1, turned on three times at the set value 2, turned on five times at the set value 3, and turned on seven times at the set value 4. The set value 5-6 turns on an average of eight times, and the set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 4 5-6.

  When the number of reservations is 4, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. At the value 4, the lighting probability of red lighting is 35%, at the setting value 5, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%, and at the setting value 6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 45%. As a result, among the 20 lightings, the red lighting is turned on once on average at the set value 1, turned on three times at the set value 2, turned on five times at the set value 3, and turned on seven times at the set value 4. When the setting value is 5, the light is turned on eight times on average, and when the setting value is 6, the light is turned on nine times on average, and it is possible to indicate which of the setting values 1 to 6 by the difference in the average lighting times.

  As described above, the interval (5%) of the difference between the lighting probabilities of red lighting of the set values 4, 5, and 6 is set to 5%. %), So that the set value 6 having the highest jackpot probability and small jackpot probability cannot be easily indicated.

  In the above description, the LED 36b illuminates three colors of red, white, and blue. However, it is possible to illuminate only red and change the number of times of illumination according to the set value regardless of the number of reservations. For example, the set value and the number of times of lighting may be associated by some function such as lighting number = set value + 2 and lighting number = set value × 2. More specifically, the number of times of lighting may be equal to the set value. However, in the above-described embodiment, the setting value is indirectly and directly specified, and the player may concentrate on the gaming machine 10 having the setting value with a high jackpot probability. The (probability of occurrence of lighting information) is preferably set lower than the probability of occurrence shown in FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control device 300 can execute a setting suggestion effect (transmission of lighting information) at a predetermined timing regarding a game. For example, when a game ball wins in the start winning opening 36 as shown in FIG. 74, the effect control device 300 can transmit the lighting information based on the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A) and turn on the LED 36b. is there. More specifically, the lighting control information (setting suggestion) based on the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A) is received by the effect control device 300 receiving the number-of-reservation command (decoration special figure reservation number command) transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect information is transmitted to the LED 36b. With this, a setting suggestion effect can be generated with a predetermined occurrence probability together with the winning of the game ball to the starting port 36, so that the game naturally gets into the eyes of the player and draws the player's attention to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved. In particular, when the hold is in the overflow state, the probability (1/5) of the setting suggestion effect becomes extremely high, and the average number of times of lighting becomes easy to understand, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  As other timings, when the power supply of the power supply device 400 (FIG. 4) is turned on, the special figure change display game is executed at a predetermined number of revolutions after the power is turned on, or the special figure change display game is set after the first (or last) big hit. When the game is executed a predetermined number of times, after a predetermined number of misses after reach, during a small hit, during a big hit, during a big hit ending, during a musical performance during a big hit, during a regular performance by the RTC 338 (FIG. 4), during a normal time Lighting information may be transmitted under the probability of FIG. 75A at any of these timings during character production and waiting for customers. Further, the timings of these events may be appropriately combined.

  In the fifth embodiment, besides the LED 36b, the frequency of occurrence of small hits, the frequency of occurrence of delayed effects, the frequency of stopping a specific symbol in a special figure variation display game, the specific appearance in a special figure variation display game (a specific outage stop) The setting suggestion effect of the setting value may be performed according to the frequency of occurrence of the symbol (design), or some setting suggestion effect may be performed on the display device 41 in synchronization with the timing.

  Note that a setting suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting a setting value (B1323) corresponding to a setting related to a game may be executed by the following method. Hereinafter, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described.

  As another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during the big hit state (special game state), whereby the interest of the game is improved. Each time the game ball wins the special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, that is, each time the special winning winning device count command (the command of the count of B1321) is received, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 in each color. Display a colored coin image (an image imitating a coin). For example, the color of the coin image is red when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4. Here, each color of the coin image corresponds to each combination of the low setting value (1, 2, 3) and the high setting value (4, 5, 6). The color of the coin image may be red when the set values are 1, 2, and 3, and yellow when the set values are 4, 5, and 6. As a part of the ending effect set in the ending effect setting process (B2111), the display device 41 notifies the total number of coin images displayed in the big hit state.

  Note that the color of the coin image may be determined by lottery. Red may be selected when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4, with a higher selection probability than the other colors. For example, in a jackpot state, when 120 game balls are won in the special winning opening and 60 red coin images, 30 yellow coins, and 30 blue coins are displayed, the player sets It can be assumed that the value is 1 or 6.

  Further, as still another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during a setting notification period (for example, 10 minutes) provided every predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), and thereby the interest of the game is improved. . The effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using the out-of-stop design (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game in the setting notification period. The effect control device 300 can determine whether or not it is the set notification period from the RTC 338 and the time timer.

  For example, if the set value is 5, the effect control device 300 sets the outage stop symbol of the first decorative special figure variation display game in the setting notification period to “1, 2, 3”, and the second decorative special figure. The loss stop symbol of the figure variation display game is set to “1, 3, 3”, and the loss stop symbol of the third decorative special figure variation display game is set to “2, 5, 6”. In this way, the effect control device 300 gradually causes the value near the set value to be included in the number of the off symbol with the lapse of time, and the number corresponding to the set value is lost at the end of the setting notification period. Be included in the number of the stop symbol. In addition, you may make it approach a set value, increasing or decreasing the number of a loss stop symbol.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using only the out-of-stop design (B2012) of the specific special (for example, the first time) decoration special figure variation display game in the setting notification period. You may make it.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is capable of controlling a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of controlling a result of the game based on a set value corresponding to a setting related to the game, and capable of executing an effect. A fluctuating display game that includes effect means (LED 36b, display device 41) and effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect means (LED 36b, display device 41), and which fluctuates and displays identification information as a game. It is feasible. The gaming machine 10 includes a start storage unit (game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory for executing the variable display game. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits set value information indicating the set value to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) A setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value can be executed by the production means, and the setting suggestion effect is executed with a predetermined probability (occurrence probability), and the probability (occurrence probability) is set to the number of start memories (the number of reservations). Set based on:

  With the above configuration, even if a hot effect appears during the game, by accumulating the number of holdings, in addition to the fun of prefetching, it is possible to provide the fun of determining the set value, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) sets the probability (occurrence probability) higher as the number of start memories (the number of suspensions) increases.

  Thereby, the motivation to accumulate the number of reservations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) changes the setting suggestion effect based on the number of start memories (the number of suspensions) (and the set value).

  Thereby, various setting suggestion effects, such as a setting suggestion effect in which the setting value is easy to determine and a setting suggestion effect in which the setting value is difficult to determine, are possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion effect at a predetermined timing regarding the game.

  As a result, the number of opportunities for suggesting the set value increases, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect means (LED 36b) includes a lighting means (LED 36b) capable of suggesting a set value in a light emission mode (for example, lighting 20 times) as a setting suggestion effect, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) It is possible to control the lighting means (LED 36b) based on the lighting information indicating the light emission mode, generate the lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability), and transmit the generated information to the lighting means (LED 36b).

  Thus, the setting value can be suggested with a simple configuration.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) can emit light of a plurality of colors different from each other, and the lighting information includes a plurality of lights each time the lighting means is turned on a plurality of times (for example, 20 times). This is information for selecting one of the colors of light, and suggests a set value based on the number of times of light of a specific color (red).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to more clearly suggest the set value with a simple configuration.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is attached to a starting opening (starting winning opening 36) capable of generating a start memory (hold) when a game ball wins, and an effect control means (effect control device 300). Can generate lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability) at the time of winning the starting ball (start winning port 36) of the game ball and transmit it to the lighting means (LED 36b).

  With the above configuration, a setting suggestion effect can be generated with a predetermined occurrence probability together with the winning of the game ball to the starting port, so that the game naturally enters the eyes of the player and draws the player's attention to enhance the interest of the game. Can be improved.

[Sixth embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment relates to an error code for collectively displaying the presence or absence of a plurality of errors.

  FIG. 76 shows the relationship between the error priority and the bit of the error code according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76A), and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) (FIG. It is a figure showing B)). FIG. 77 is a display example of an error code and an error content according to the sixth embodiment. When there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77 (A)), FIG. 77 (B) shows a case where one error has been resolved (FIG. 77 (B)) and a case where all errors have been resolved (FIG. 77 (C)).

  The sixth embodiment is characterized in that when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, an error code (error codes 341 and 342) including the error is displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 77).

  The error code is, as shown in FIGS. 76 (A) and (B), collectively displaying presence / absence information obtained by encoding the presence / absence of a plurality of error contents occurring in the gaming machine 10, in binary notation. , Hexadecimal notation. In hexadecimal notation, b0 to b3 in binary notation are lower bits, and b4 to b7 in binary notation are upper bits.

  Here, the error content displayed in FIG. 76 (A) is an example of a part of the error content generated in the gaming machine 10, and although there are actually more error contents, the description will be made. Other error details have been omitted for simplicity. Therefore, the number of bits in binary notation and hexadecimal notation also changes according to the number of error contents.

  Error information displayed in FIG. 76A is associated with priority order information. The priority information is a table in which the priorities of error contents to be solved by the game arcade manager or the attendant are arranged. Therefore, the relationship between each error content and the priority is basically unchanged.

  On the other hand, the relationship between the priority (error content) and the bits (b0-b6) is arbitrary. Therefore, in FIG. 76A, the order of the bits and the priority (error content) are matched, but the priority (error content) can be set randomly for the bit.

  The information of the table according to FIG. 76A is stored in the RAM 322 or the FeRAM 323 of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4). The information in the table also includes character information (character information 343) representing the content of the error.

  Effect control device 300 generates error codes 341 and 342 (FIG. 76 (B)) based on the error command transmitted from game control device 100.

  The error detection of the gaming machine 10 is performed by the game control device 100. The game control device 100 detects a magnetic error, which is an abnormality detection of the magnetic sensor switch 61 (FIG. 6, A1315), and detects a panel radio error, which is an abnormality detection of the radio sensor 62. (FIG. 6, A1316), fraud & winning management processing (FIG. 8, A2004, A2006) for detecting a special winning opening error, which is an illegal winning in the special winning opening, to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening). Then, a fraud & winning management process (FIG. 8, A2008) for detecting a general power error, which is an illegal winning, is performed, and an error command (including a fraud command) corresponding to each error is transmitted. Further, by referring to the gaming state monitoring table 1 (first embodiment), a frame radio wave error, which is an abnormal occurrence in a frame radio fraud signal, and a detection of an open state of the glass frame 15 by the glass frame open detection switch 63 are performed. A frame opening error, a body frame opening error that is a detection of an open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) by the front frame opening detection switch 64 (a body frame opening detection switch), and a switch abnormality error that is an occurrence of an abnormality detection signal are detected. Then, an error command indicating presence / absence of each error content is transmitted (FIG. 9, A2204, A2207). By executing the error / illegal setting process (FIG. 39, B1316), the effect control device 300 receives the error command.

  As shown in FIG. 77A, effect control device 300 can display error codes 341 and 342 on display device 41. At this time, the error code 341 can be expressed in binary notation as shown on the left side, and the error code 342 can be written in hexadecimal notation as shown on the right side. As a result, the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents is grasped in advance, and the error contents can be immediately grasped by displaying the error codes 341 and 342. Also, by using the binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped.

  In the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) in FIG. 77A, “panel radio wave error” and “frame radio wave error” occur simultaneously. Are respectively shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), effect control device 300 can display character information 343 indicating the content of an error adjacent to error codes 341 and 342. The character information 343 indicates, for example, the error content having the highest priority among the error contents corresponding to the code (presence information) that is present in the error code 341, that is, “1” in binary notation. ing. According to FIG. 77 (A), the error content with the highest priority is “panel radio wave error”, so that the display device 41 displays character information 343 of “panel radio wave error”. By displaying the character information 343 in this way, it is possible to immediately grasp the contents of the error to be preferentially solved.

  Note that the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are always displayed if an error occurs after the power is turned on, and the same applies during a game. Further, even during the variable display game, the error codes 341, 342 and the character information 343 are superimposed and displayed on the variable display area 610 (first variable display area) in which the large symbol among the special decoration symbols is displayed. However, the small special symbols in the decorative special symbols are not superimposed and displayed on the variable display area 615 (second variable display area) in which the variable display is performed.

  By the way, the processing for preparing the error command (A1315, A1316, A2004, A2006, A2008, A2204, A2207) and the error / illegal setting processing (B1316) are executed with their contents constantly updated. That is, if the content of the error is updated, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are also updated.

  Therefore, for example, when the “panel radio wave error” is resolved, the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) is updated to the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010000) as shown in FIG. 77 (B). The error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) is updated to the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 10), and the character information 343 is updated from “panel radio wave error” to “frame radio wave error”.

  When the "frame radio wave error" is eliminated, all errors are eliminated, and the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are not generated. At this time, all the binary presence / absence information constituting the error code 341 is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display of the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 on the display device 41 is deleted. As a result, it can be easily grasped that all errors have been resolved.

  FIG. 78 is an example of switching the display of error contents according to the sixth embodiment, in which a panel radio wave error is displayed as an initial state (FIG. 78 (A)), and a frame radio wave error is displayed by operating the operation unit once. (FIG. 78 (B)) and an example of operating the operation unit once to display a switch abnormality error (FIG. 78 (C)). In the present embodiment, the operation unit (operation means) is the effect button 25, but may be a cross key (not shown) or the like.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed on the display device 41, the character information 343 initially displays the error content having the highest priority. In FIG. 78A, the error code 341 indicates that, for example, a “panel radio wave error”, a “frame radio wave error”, and a “switch abnormal error” have occurred (see FIG. 76). Then, initially, “board radio wave error” having the highest priority is displayed as character information 343.

  Further, effect control device 300 can display underline 344 (predetermined image) adjacent to presence / absence information “1” of error code 341 corresponding to displayed character information 343. In FIG. 78A, an underline 344 (predetermined image) indicating the presence / absence information “1” of the second (bit: b1) from the right of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 of “panel radio wave error” is displayed. Is done. The underline 344 is displayed adjacent to below the presence / absence information “1”. This makes the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence / absence information “1” in the error code 341 clear. In addition to the underline 344, a predetermined image that surrounds the presence / absence information “1” with a square or a circle may be applied.

  The effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) is connected via a switch input circuit 336 to an effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a) serving as an operation unit operated by a player in a variable display game or the like. (FIG. 4). Then, each time the effect control device 300 receives the signal transmitted by the button operation of the effect button 25, the character information 343 corresponding to the plurality of presence information in the error code 341 can be switched and displayed. Has become. Thus, the contents of all the errors that have occurred can be grasped from the character information 343.

  Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, “frame radio wave error” is displayed as the character information 343 as shown in FIG. 78 (B), and the fifth from the right of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 ( An underline 344 is displayed below the presence / absence information “1” of the bit: b4).

  Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), “switch abnormality error” is displayed as character information 343, and the first (from the left of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343) An underline 344 is displayed below the presence / absence information “1” of the bit: b7). Then, when the effect button 25 is further pressed once, the display returns to the display of FIG.

  When the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed even during the variable display game, the operation related to the effect of the variable display game by the effect button 25 is limited, and the character information 343 is switched by the effect button 25. The operation will be performed with priority.

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has a game control unit (game control device 100) for transmitting a command related to a game, and an effect capable of displaying an effect corresponding to the command on the display unit (display device 41). The game control device (game control device 100) includes a control unit (effect control device 300), and when any one of a plurality of errors that can occur in the game machine 10 occurs, the error Is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) sends the error codes (341, 342) for displaying the presence or absence of a plurality of errors collectively to the error command. On the display means (display device 41).

  According to the above configuration, the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the contents of the error is grasped in advance, so that the error codes 341 and 342 are displayed, so that the contents of the error can be grasped immediately in a lump.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) generates the error code (341) using a plurality of presence / absence information (binary notation) individually indicating the presence / absence of an error.

  Thus, by using the binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) arranges presence / absence information in the error code based on the priority of the error.

  Thereby, it is possible to grasp the error to be dealt with with priority in the error code.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of the error, and has the highest priority among the presence / absence information “1” included in the error code 341. The character information 343 relating to the error is displayed on the display means (display device 41).

  Accordingly, even if the correspondence between the presence / absence information of the error code 341 and the error content is not grasped, the error content having the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343, so that the error content can be easily grasped. Can be.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of an error, and priority information (FIG. 76 (A)) indicating the priority of the error. Character information 343 relating to the error with the highest priority is displayed on the display means (display device 41) based on the priority information among the errors that have been detected in 341 and 342.

  Thereby, the error content with the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343 without knowing the content of the error codes 341 and 342, so that the error content can be easily understood.

  In the sixth embodiment, an operation means (effect button 25) capable of generating a signal in accordance with an operation of a player is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives a signal from the operation means (effect button 25). Each time it performs, the character information 343 relating to the error which is included in the error codes 341 and 342 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41).

  Thus, the contents of all the errors that have occurred can be grasped from the character information 343.

  In the sixth embodiment, an operation means (effect button 25) capable of generating a signal in accordance with an operation of a player is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives a signal from the operation means (effect button 25). Each time the character information 343 related to the presence / absence information “1” in the error code 341 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41), the character information 343 is displayed on the display means (display device 41). A predetermined image (underline 344) indicating presence / absence information “1” related to character information 343 is displayed.

  This makes the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence / absence information “1” in the error code 341 clear.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) does not generate the error codes 341 and 342 when all of the errors in the error codes 341 and 342 are null.

  As a result, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41) are deleted, so that it can be easily grasped that all errors have been resolved.

[Seventh embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those in the first to sixth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to the attachment of the part 510 as in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the detachable part 510 according to the seventh embodiment is attached to the gaming machine 10. The seventh embodiment is a modification of the second embodiment. The collation procedure between the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) of the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46B, a part 510B for model B having part identification information (first identification information) that does not match model identification information (second identification information) of model A is provided. When attached to model A of gaming machine 10, effect control device 300 notifies an error via speakers 19a and 19b and display device 41.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 drives the board decorating device 46 (or the frame decorating device 18). In this case, light emission is permitted, and driving (here, light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, the frame decoration device 18 (decoration device 18b) decorates the game board 30 by lighting (light emission) of an LED or the like. When mounted on the model A, lighting (light emission) of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

  Specifically, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 determines whether the frame decoration LED control circuit 333 (or the board decoration LED control circuit) 334) By stopping the driving of (FIG. 4), the driving (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited.

  Accordingly, the lighting member such as the LED included in the frame decoration device 18 (or the lighting member such as the LED included in the board decoration device 46) does not emit light that the unit is wrong. Therefore, the game room manager or the attendant can easily understand the incorrect mounting of the unit, so that the cause can be removed smoothly. In addition, since it is not used as it is by mistake, the cause of failure can be reduced and the life can be extended.

  As shown in FIG. 79, also in the seventh embodiment, a unit error can be notified by voice information (voice of "unit error") using the speakers 19a and 19b. Here, the output of the audio information can be stopped by operating the effect button 25 (FIG. 4). In addition, the display device 41 can display the notification information 345 for notifying the “unit error” by characters. Note that the notification information 345 is displayed in preference to an image related to initialization (for example, a character 431 of “being initialized” in FIG. 90 of an eighth embodiment described later) or an image related to power failure recovery (A1035). You.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 that is displaying the stoppage symbol of the special figure variable display game. As shown in FIG. 80, the notification information 345 for notifying the “unit error” is displayed on the display device 41 as long as the part 510B whose part identification information is different from the model identification information is attached, and during the game (variation) The same applies to (during display games).

  During the special figure change display game, the notification information 345 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the change display area 610 (first change display area) where the large symbol change display is performed, but the change display area where the small symbol change display is performed. 615 (second variable display area) is not displayed. Thus, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can check the progress and the result of the special figure variable display game in the variable display area 615.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode of the notification information according to the seventh embodiment is changed according to the operation of the movable body. The notification information 345 of the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 even during the initial operation at the time of turning on the power of the movable bodies 44c and 44d (movable auditors). Details of the initial operation of the movable bodies 44c and 44d will be described in an eighth embodiment described later.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, the movable bodies 44c and 44d are arranged at positions where a part thereof slightly overlaps the front surface of the display device 41 in the initial state (standby state). As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the movable bodies 44c and 44d move to the center of the front surface of the display device 41 during the initial operation. Therefore, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 at a position that does not overlap with the movable bodies 44c and 44d, so that the notification content (“unit error”) can be reliably notified.

  On the left side of FIG. 81 (A), the notification information 345 is largely displayed at the center of the display device 41. However, in FIG. 81 (B), the notification information 345 is displayed, for example, at the upper left of the display device 41 (another location). May be displayed smaller than the display mode of FIG. 81 (A). By changing the display mode of the notification information 345 in accordance with the positions of the movable bodies 44c and 44d in this way, it is possible to strongly alert the game arcade manager or the attendant.

  In addition, as shown on the right side of FIG. 81A, the notification information 345 may be displayed from the beginning on the display device 41 at a position where the movable members 44c and 44d do not overlap even if the movable members 44c and 44d operate. By arranging at least the notification information 345 in the display device 41 in an area different from the area covered by the movable bodies 44c and 44d, it is possible to call attention to a game arcade manager or a clerk.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of the part collation processing according to the seventh embodiment when driving (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited. The part collation processing of the seventh embodiment is almost the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but as shown in FIG. 82, after (or before) the error notification (B5006), the frame decoration device 18 ( A process (B5006a) for prohibiting driving of the board decoration device 46) may be added. The prohibition of the driving of the frame decoration device 18 is performed by the main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) stopping the output of the signal to the frame decoration device 18 or stopping the driving of the frame decoration LED control circuit 333.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the identification board 513 of the part 510 according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification board 513 (I ² CI / O expander 815) of the part 510 of the seventh embodiment is the same as the identification board 513 of the second embodiment, but the bus controller 834 includes A ROM 834a storing part identification information (first identification information) of the identification board 513 is provided.

Therefore, the bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address (the address determined by A3, A2, A1, and A0) set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Then, if they match, the part identification information (first identification information) stored in the ROM 834a is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) for associating a model designation command with model identification information according to the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) showing the classification of non-conforming models. .

  As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of effect control means 300 stores a table of models compatible with gaming machine 10 and model identification information corresponding thereto. . In FIG. 84 (A), models A to D are registered as models that can be identified by the gaming machine 10. For example, assuming that the model of the gaming machine 10 is model A (any model A-D), it is determined that the part identification information of the attached part 510 does not match the model identification information of the model A. Driving (light emission) of the decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) is prohibited, and an error notification or the like is performed.

  Here, if the part identification information matches any of the model identification information of the models A to D, it is determined that the part 510 is a standard product conforming to the gaming machine 10. 510 can be determined as a nonstandard product that is not suitable for the gaming machine 10.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 is controlled by the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. The driving of 4) can be prohibited.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, a part (part 510) is changed as a part (model element) of the frame decoration device 18 as a device for providing the gaming machine at low cost. If the parts (parts 510) are changed incorrectly in the field, there is a possibility that a failure may occur if the parts (parts 510) are incorrect. In addition, there is a possibility that the frame decoration device 18 is used in a wrong state.

  However, in the seventh embodiment, even if the wrong unit (part 510B) is attached, it is not always necessary to prohibit the driving of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46), and the progress of the game is affected. By allowing a part of the part 510 to be driven in a range where there is no error, it is possible to reduce the causes of failure.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (B), in the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of the effect control device 300, when the part 510 is not suitable for the gaming machine 10, it is classified into three types of errors. Is stored. The case where the part 510 does not match the gaming machine 10 is a case where the part identification information of the part 510 does not match the model identification information (specific model identification information) of the gaming machine 10 to which the part 510 is attached.

  The parts 510 decorate the game board 30 (FIG. 2), and include LEDs and movable members that can be controlled by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the parts 510 can be classified into those provided with only LEDs and those provided with LEDs and movable members according to the corresponding part identification information.

  For example, if the last two digits of the part identification number are “00” or “01”, it can be determined that the part 510 has only LEDs. When the last two digits of the part identification information are “10” or “11”, it can be determined that the part 510 includes the LED and the movable member.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the part identification information has a form in which the last two digits can identify the corresponding model AD, but the first two digits identify the model AD. It is good also as a form which can be performed. In this case, it can be determined whether the part 510 includes only the LED or the LED and the movable member based on the first two digits of the part identification information. By comparing a part of the part identification information in this way, the type of the part 510 can be classified.

  As described above, the effect control device 300 (the main control microcomputer 311) determines the part identification information (first identification information) transmitted from the part 510 and the specific model identification information (second identification information) included in the effect control device 300. Can be compared, and the part 510 can be classified as a conforming product that does not match a conforming product that matches the specific model identification information.

  In the case of a conforming product, the part 510 can be driven without any limitation.

  On the other hand, in the case of a non-conforming product, it is a standard product and a first class including only LEDs, a standard product and a second class including an LED and a movable member, and a non-standard product according to the reference table in FIG. It can be classified into a third classification.

  Regarding the first category, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, the rating of the LED of the part 510 corresponds to the gaming machine 10, so that the lighting of the LED can be permitted.

  Regarding the second classification, the LED and the movable member of the part 510 can be driven because the rating of the part 510 corresponds to the gaming machine 10 as long as the part 510 is a standard product. However, if the operation mode of the movable member corresponding to the gaming machine 10 is different due to a difference in the model, such as a reciprocating operation and a circling operation, the parts 510 may be damaged. Therefore, in the second classification, it is necessary to prohibit the driving (movement, rotation, etc.) of the movable member of the part 510 while permitting the driving (light emission) of the LED.

  Regarding the third classification, when the part 510 is a nonstandard product, there is a possibility that the ratings of the LED and the movable member are different from those of the gaming machine 10, and when these are driven, the board and the like on the gaming machine 10 may be damaged. Therefore, it is necessary to prohibit the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 irrespective of the presence or absence.

  When the part 510 is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 only needs to limit the signal related to the part 510 among the signals transmitted to the board decoration device 46. When the part 510 belongs to the second category, transmission of the signal related to the LED of the part 510 is allowed and transmission of the signal related to the movable member is prohibited. For example, when the part 510 belongs to the third category, The transmission of the signal related to the LED 510 and the movable member may be prohibited.

For example, when the I ² CI / O expander 815 shown in FIG. 83 drives the board decoration device 46, for example, PORT1 is a port for driving the LED of the part 510, and PORT2 is a movable member (motor) of the part 510. , The output of signals belonging to the addresses of PORT1 and PORT2 may be prohibited.

  When the part 510 is configured to be independent of the board decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 permits transmission of a signal related to the LED of the part 510 when the part 510 belongs to the second category. In addition, the transmission of the signal related to the movable member may be prohibited, and when the part 510 belongs to the third classification, the transmission of the signal related to the LED of the part 510 and the movable member may be prohibited.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of the part collation processing according to the seventh embodiment in which the drive mode is changed by classifying the part 510. The part collation processing of the seventh embodiment is the same as the part collation processing of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but if the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (result of B5005 is “N”), an error occurs. The notification (B5006) is performed, and an error classification process for the part identification information is performed (B5006b). As in FIG. 82, a configuration in which the processing of step B5006a is executed between steps B5006 and B5006b to prohibit driving of the frame decoration device 18 is also possible.

  When it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the first classification, the driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted (B5006c).

  If it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the second classification, the driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted, while the driving of the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006d).

  In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the third classification, the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006e).

  In this way, even if the attached part 510 is used incorrectly, the progress of the game is not affected, and the number of failure factors can be reduced, so that the life can be extended.

[Operation and Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment includes a game control unit (game control device 100) capable of executing a game and an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game. And a decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300) to perform a light emission effect. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which first identification information (part identification information) that is electrically readable is assigned. The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). If the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match with each other with the second identification information (model identification information), a part of the decoration device (the frame decoration device 18, Alternatively, the driving of the board decoration device 46) is prohibited.

  Thereby, since the drive of a part of the decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) is prohibited by attaching the wrong component (part 510), it is determined that the attached component (part 510) is wrong. The place manager or the attendant can quickly and easily make a judgment, and the cause can be removed smoothly by replacing the part (part 510).

  In the seventh embodiment, the decorating devices (the frame decorating device 18 and the board decorating device 46) decorate the frame decorating device 18 that performs the light emission effect for decorating the frame of the gaming machine 10 and the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine. And a board decoration device 46 for performing a light emission effect for the purpose, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured such that the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match. In addition, the driving of the board decoration device 46 is permitted and the driving of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

  Thereby, the game room manager or the attendant can easily understand that the attached part (part 510) is wrong by checking whether or not the frame decoration device 18 is driven. The cause can be removed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the part (part 510) is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is a standard product compatible with the gaming machine 10 and has a light emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300). One class, a standard product, a second class including a light-emitting member (LED) and a movable member that can be driven by the production control means (production control device 300), and a non-standard product (a non-standard product) ) Third classification. The effect control means (effect control device 300) allows the driving of the part (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the light emission member (LED) of the part (part 510) in the case of the second classification. Driving is permitted and driving of the movable member is prohibited. In the case of the third classification, driving of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

  Thus, even if the attached part (part 510) is used incorrectly, the progress of the game is not affected, and the number of failure factors can be reduced, so that the life can be extended.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, an effect control means (effect control means 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game, and a light emission. And a decoration device (panel decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) for performing effects. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) that is configured as a part of the decoration device and is assigned first electrically readable identification information (part identification information). The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). When the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match with each other with the second identification information (model identification information), the part (parts 510) is transferred to the gaming machine 10. The first category that includes a light emitting member (LED) that is a conforming standard product and can be driven by the effect control unit (the effect control device 300), a standard product that is a light emitting member (LED), and an effect control unit (an effect control unit) It can be classified into a second class including a movable member that can be driven by the control device 300) and a third class that is not a standard product (it is a nonstandard product). The effect control means (effect control device 300) allows the driving of the part (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the light emission member (LED) of the part (part 510) in the case of the second classification. Driving is permitted and driving of the movable member is prohibited. In the case of the third classification, driving of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

  Thus, even if the attached part (part 510) is used incorrectly, the progress of the game is not affected, and the number of failure factors can be reduced, so that the life can be extended.

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 for displaying an image related to a game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes first identification information (part identification information) and second identification information. When the (model identification information) does not match, the notification information 345 (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch is displayed on the display device 41.

  Thus, by displaying the notification information 345 on the display device 41, the error can be reliably notified to the game arcade manager or the attendant.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display game for changing and displaying the identification information on the display device 41, and as a display area of the variable display game on the display device 41, a large design. A first variable display area (variable display area 610) for performing variable display and a second variable display for displaying small patterns (615A, 615B, 615C) smaller than the first variable display area and smaller than the large symbol. The display information is displayed in a manner including a variable display area (variable display area 615), and the notification information 345 is displayed not on the second variable display area but on the first variable display area.

  Thereby, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can check the progress and the result of the variable display game in the variable display area 615.

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a board effect device 44 including operable movable bodies (44c, 44d). The effect control means (effect control device 300) can drive the movable bodies (44c, 44d) of the board effect device 44, and the first identification information (part identification information) does not match the second identification information (model identification information). In the case of, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 in an area that does not overlap with the area covered by the movable bodies (44c, 44d) by driving the board rendering device 44.

  Accordingly, the notification information 345 is not hidden by the movable bodies (44c, 44d), and thus the notification information 345 can be always visually recognized.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the notification information 345 in accordance with the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

  Thereby, the display mode of the notification information 345 can be optimized to the highest visibility state in accordance with the change in the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers (19a, 19b)) for outputting a sound effect according to the gaming state. When the first identification information (parts identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the effect control means (effect control device 300) outputs sound information (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch. Is output to the sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b).

  As a result, an error has also occurred in the game arcade manager or staff in a position where the game board 30 (the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46) and the display device 41 on which the notification information 345 is displayed cannot be visually recognized. Can be known.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 96. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments. The seventh embodiment relates to an initial operation control process.

[Game board according to the eighth embodiment]
First, the gaming board 30 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is obtained by adding a light guide plate 251 and internal objects 44c and 44d (inside movable members) to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment.

  The light guide plate 251 is attached to the center case 40, and reflects a part of the light guided and emitted from the light emitting member (for example, an LED) attached to the end portion, so that the light guide plate 251 can be visually recognized from the front. A pattern or the like (for example, a spark-shaped pattern as shown in FIG. 86) is raised on the surface in a known manner (see JP-A-2006-83463 and JP-A-2017-148150). The light guide plate 251 is arranged in front of the display device 41 (on the player side).

  The internal objects 44c and 44d (internal movable members) are provided in the board effect device 44, and increase the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41.

  The internal character 44c is used to make the character “heavy” of the internal character 44c stand out with a motor (not shown) that can be positioned in front of the display device 41 (on the player side) and the character “heavy”. And a light-emitting member (eg, LED) capable of emitting light around the character.

  Further, the internal accessory 44d includes a motor (not shown) capable of positioning the character “heat” of the internal accessory 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 (on the player side), and the like. A light-emitting member (for example, an LED) that can emit light around the character to make the character stand out.

  Therefore, when the internal members 44c and 44d are both moved, the characters "hot heat" visible to the player are arranged in front of the display device 41 (FIGS. 86, 90, and 93). reference). As shown in FIG. 86, in the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, when the patterns are raised on the surface of the light guide plate 251 and the internal characters 44c and 44d are moved, the patterns and the internal characters are moved. 44 c and 44 d overlap each other in front of the display screen of the display device 41.

(Light guide plate control processing)
FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a light guide plate control process according to the eighth embodiment. The light guide plate control process may be executed by the effect control device 300, for example, as a part of the decoration control process (B0020) in the main process (FIG. 36).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B7001). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is restored.

  When it is determined that the power is not turned on (result of B7001 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs a normal control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like. It starts (B7003) and ends the light guide plate control processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is turned on (result of B7001 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command whose probability setting is being changed has been received (B7002).

  In the process of step B7002, if the command whose probability setting is being changed is a command whose probability setting is being changed by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) (result of B1325 is "Y"), It is determined that it has been received. That is, the front frame 12 (body frame, body part) is opened (result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028). Is "Y"), and the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). When the setting change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed during the change of the probability setting, the set value related to the game condition is changed. In addition, information of the set value related to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

  Then, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (the result of B7002 is “N”), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the internal accessory 44c, It is determined whether or not 44d is performing an initial operation (B7005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has been received (result of B7002 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not a command for ending the setting of probability has been received. A determination is made (B7004).

  In the process of step B7004, when the command of the probability setting change ends in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 39) and the MODE section indicates the setting change system by the command of the probability setting change end (result of B1325 is "Y"), It is determined that it has been received. In other words, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is “Y”), and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the command to end the probability setting change is a game. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300 (A2421).

  Then, when it is determined that the command for ending the change of the probability setting is not received (the result of B7004 is “N”), that is, when the setting of the probability is being changed, the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. I do.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the setting of the probability has been received (the result of B7004 is “Y”), that is, when the change of the probability has been completed (after the completion of the setting), It is determined whether or not the internal accessories 44c and 44d are performing an initial operation (B7005).

  In the process of step B7005, effect control device 300 determines whether or not internal characters 44c and 44d are performing an initial operation (B7005). The details of the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the effect control device 300 determines that the internal characters 44c and 44d are performing the initial operation (result of B7005 is “Y”), the light guide plate control process ends. As described above, the light emission (initial operation) of the light guide plate 251 is not performed during the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d. In addition, during the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the light emission by the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and may not perform the light emission by the light emission effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal characters 44c and 44d are not performing the initial operation (result of B7005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs an initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 (B7006). .

  In the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 causes all light emitting members attached to the end of the light guide plate 251 to emit light as an initial operation, as shown in FIG. 89, for example. Control is performed to reflect light from the member forward from the light guide plate 251 (initial operation control).

  FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board 30 when the light guide plate 251 according to the eighth embodiment performs an initial operation. A game arcade manager or the like (including hall staff) can confirm that the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting member operate normally by visually recognizing the pattern floating on the surface of the light guide plate 251. When the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. When the initial operation control condition of the external accessory 95a described later in FIG. 88 is satisfied (the result of B7109 is “N”), as shown in FIG. 89, the external operation 95a is controlled together with the initial operation control of the light guide plate 251. May be performed. The external accessory 95a is a part of the frame effect device, and is, for example, an accessory operable to protrude from above the glass frame 15 (open portion). The display screen of the display device 41 is turned off so that the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be easily seen. However, the display may be displayed in a state where the brightness is lower than usual. A character such as “Initializing” (for example, character 431 in FIG. 90) may be displayed at a position or the like that does not overlap with the pattern of light guide plate 251 (a position that can be visually recognized by a game arcade manager or the like from the front) on the completed screen. .

(Movable body control processing)
FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the movable body control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B7101). Note that it may be determined whether or not the power is restored.

  When it is determined that the power is not turned on (result of B7101 is “N”), effect control device 300 performs a normal control process according to the effect contents set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44) and the like. It starts (B7103) and ends the movable body control processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that power is turned on (result of B7101 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command whose probability setting is being changed has been received (B7102).

  When it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting is received (result of B7102 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for ending the change in probability setting is received (B7104). . On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (result of B7102 is “N”), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the light guide plate 251 is turned off. It is determined whether or not an initial operation is being performed (B7105).

  In the process of step B7104, effect control device 300 determines that a command for ending the setting of the probability has been received (result of B7104 is “Y”), that is, when the change of the probability setting has been completed (setting completed). After), it is determined whether or not the light guide plate 251 is performing an initial operation (B7105). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the change of the probability setting has not been received (the result of B7104 is “N”), that is, when the change of the probability setting is in progress, the internal character object 44c, Only at 44d, the initial operation control process is started (B7107).

  In the initial operation control processing (B7107) for the internal characters 44c and 44d, for example, the motor for moving the internal characters 44c and the motor for moving the internal characters 44d of the board production device 44 are driven, and the characters After the internal objects 44c and 44d are operated in front of the display screen of the display device 41 so as to be recognizable, control is performed to operate to the initial position (initial operation control). Note that, for example, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d are sequentially performed so that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d is performed after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c is completed. May be executed. Similarly, when another internal character other than the internal characters 44c and 44d is further attached, the initial operation control of each internal character is sequentially executed.

  Further, in the process of step B7105, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is performing the initial operation (result of B7105 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B7109, and the main body frame is It is determined whether a body frame opening error has occurred due to the opening (B7109). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is not in the initial operation (result of B7105 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B7106, and the body frame opening error occurs. It is determined whether or not there is (B7106). For example, when a status ON command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

  In the process of step B7106, when the effect control device 300 determines that the body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 starts the initial operation control process only for the internal characters 44c and 44d ( B7107). On the other hand, when it is determined that the body frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7106 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether the internal characters 44c and 44d and the external character 95a are present as shown in FIG. The initial operation control processing is started (B7108).

  FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 30 when the internal accessories 44c and 44d and the external accessory 95a according to the eighth embodiment perform an initial operation. In the process of step B7108, the effect control device 300 performs an initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a together with an initial operation control process of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, as shown in FIG. 90, for example. Further, as shown in FIG. 90, when the internal accessories 44c and 44d operate in front of the display screen of the display device 41, positions where they do not overlap from the front (positions where a game arcade manager or the like can visually recognize from the front). Is displayed with a character 431 of “Initializing”. When the initial operation control processing (B7108) of the internal accessories 44c and 44d and the external accessory 95a ends, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control processing.

  In the process of step B7109, when the effect control device 300 determines that the body frame opening error has occurred (result of B7109 is “Y”), the movable body control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the body frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7109 is “N”), effect control device 300 starts the initial operation control process only for external accessory 95a (B7110). While the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is started, and the game arcade manager or the like can use the external player as shown in FIG. The operation of the object 95a and the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be simultaneously checked. After that, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process. Also, during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 (when the result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation is performed only for the external accessory 95a (B7110), but the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is performed. No action is taken. During the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the initial operation of the internal characters 44 c and 44 d, and may not be moved by the effect. Light emission of the light emitting member may not be performed.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  When the power is turned on in a normal state at time T71, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (B7006), and the light emitting member (LED) at the end of the light guide plate 251 emits light as shown in FIG. Start.

  When the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is started by the movable body control process (B7110), and the external accessory 95a moves (operates) to a position protruding from above the game board 30. On the other hand, the internal belongings 44c and 44d are stopped without being subjected to the initial operation control, and the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off (off).

  At time T72, the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 ends (the result of B7105 is “N”), the light emission of the light emitting member of the light guide plate 251 ends, and the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44c and 44d starts. When the process starts (B7108), the internal objects 44c and 44d move (operate) in front of the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. Note that the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is continuously performed. In addition, on the display screen of the display device 41, a character 431 “initializing” is displayed at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not overlap with the internal characters 44c and 44d (initialization display).

  At time T73, the movement (operation) of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessories 44c, 44d ends, and the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c, 44d start emitting light at the respective positions. When the light emission ends at time T74. In order to return to the original position, the movement of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessories 44c and 44d starts. As described above, while the internal members 44c and 44d (movable members) themselves are moving (operating), the light emitting members of the internal members 44c and 44d do not emit light (initial operation) in front of the display device 41. . The movement of the external role 95a and the movement of the internal role 44c, 44d do not need to be started or ended at the same time.

  When the movement of the internal belongings 44c and 44d ends at time T75, the initialization display displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 disappears, and the display changes to a normal display screen (normal display). Thereafter, at time T76, the movement of the external accessory 95a ends, and the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 ends. The display screen of the display device 41 may be switched to the normal display in accordance with the end of the movement of the external accessory 95a at the time T76.

  Note that the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is performed after the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 is completed, but the order may be reversed. That is, the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 may be performed after the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is completed.

[Game board when the variable display game is played during normal times]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, a case will be described in which the effect display device 300 according to the eighth embodiment performs the variable display game at the normal time. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When the variable display game is played during normal times (during initial operation control processing, during probability setting change, and during probability setting confirmation), as shown in FIG. 92, the display on the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is performed. On the display screen of the device 41, decoration first symbols A to C (identification information, identification symbol, decoration special symbol) are variably displayed in a plurality of variable display regions 610 (left region 610A, right region 610B, middle region 610C). You. For example, the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed in a reach state of “7 ↓ 7” as shown in FIG. Further, the internal characters 44c and 44d are stopped at a position (initial position) before being movable (moving), and a part of the lower part of the internal character 44c overlaps the upper end of the display screen of the display device 41, A part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d overlaps the lower end of the display screen.

  FIG. 93 is a front view of the gaming board 30 when a reach effect, which is an effect corresponding to the reach state, is performed while the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When the reach effect is performed, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 93, a light-emission effect in which the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light is performed, and the internal role objects 44c and 44b are connected to the display device 41. The player moves (moves, moves) in front of the display screen, and the player can recognize that the characters "hot" are displayed side by side. In addition, a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44b emit light is performed, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

  Then, by performing the reach effect from the state of FIG. 92, as shown in FIG. 93, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed in a small size at the lower right of the display screen. In addition, instead of the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, a decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) in the variable display area 615 may be displayed small in the lower right of the display screen.

[Game board when the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a case where a variable display game is performed during the initial operation control processing of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a front view of the gaming board 30 when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game while performing the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  When the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 94, the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment has the same decoration as in the normal case. While the fluctuation display “7 ↓ 7” of one symbol A to C is displayed small, the effect on the display screen corresponding to the reach effect in FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 has no display other than the decorative first symbols A to C and is displayed as a black screen. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display “7 ↓ 7” of the first decorations A to C, and when performing the initialization display, the entire screen is displayed. It may be displayed dark.

  In addition, in the internal roles 44c and 44d that are stopped at the initial position, a light emitting effect in which the light emitting member emits light is performed on the spot without moving. Therefore, the player can visually recognize that a part of the lower end of the internal character 44c and a part of the upper part of the internal character 44d emit light.

  Although the light emitting members emit light during the initial operation control processing, the internal characters 44c and 44d move in front of the display screen of the display device 41, unlike the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect. After that, light emission is performed by the initial operation control process. The time during which light is emitted by the initial operation control process (from time T73 to time T74 shown in FIG. 91) may be a time during which a game arcade manager or the like can confirm the light emission operation (for example, 5 sec), and the reach effect is performed. This is a relatively short time as compared with the light emission time (for example, 30 seconds) in the accompanying light emission effect. Therefore, when visually recognizing the light emission effect of the light emitting members of the internal auditors' bodies 44c and 44d, the player can recognize that the light emission effect is not the light emission by the initial operation control process but the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect.

[Modification of the game board when the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of a modified example in which the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control processing of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach display is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the modified example of the eighth embodiment is the same as in the normal case. 93, the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the first decorations A to C is displayed in a small size, but the effect on the display screen corresponding to the reach effect in FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 has no display other than the decorative first symbols A to C and is displayed as a black screen. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variable display “7 ↓ 7” of the first decorations A to C, and when performing the initialization display, the entire screen is displayed. It may be displayed dark.

  In addition to the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95, a light-emission effect in which the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light is performed. On the other hand, the internal members 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting members also continue to turn off. The light emission time (for example, 5 sec) by the initial operation control processing of the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a is the same as the reach effect as in the internal characters 44c and 44d described in FIG. Is relatively short as compared with the light emission time (for example, 30 sec) in the light emission effect associated with. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effect of the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a, the player recognizes that the light emission effect is not the light emission due to the initial operation process but the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect. Can be.

[Modification of the game board when the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a second modified example in the case where the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control processing of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a second modified example of the front view of the gaming board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while performing the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  When the variable display game is performed during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 96, the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the second modified example according to the eighth embodiment is normally displayed. In the same manner as above, the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the first decorations A to C is displayed in a small size, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect (original reach effect) in FIG. 93 is displayed on the entire display screen. Therefore, by visually recognizing the effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, the player can recognize that the reach effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, the internal members 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting members also continue to turn off. In addition, the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a are also kept turned off.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is an effect related to a fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) that fluctuates identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C, this special figure). Is provided on the display device 41 (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (instruction) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light-emitting member thereof, or light-emitting members of the internal members 44c and 44d). The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable auditorium and the light emitting effect means by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and the initial operation of the movable auditorium during the initial operation of the light emitting effect means. And does not execute a predetermined operation.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, movable members (internal members 44 c and 44 d) and light-emitting effect means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting members, or internal members) are provided as a plurality of members that perform effects related to the game. Since the initial operation of the light emitting members 44c and 44d) can be easily checked, maintenance can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means (the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting members thereof, or the light emitting members of the internal objects 44c and 44d) are controlled based on the irradiation of light from the ends. The light guide plate 251 in which the pattern of the light guide plate 251 emerges, and irradiating means (light emission of the light guide plate 251) which is disposed at an end of the light guide plate 251 so as to face the opposing surface of the light guide plate 251 A member). The production control unit (production control device 300) performs the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) while the irradiating unit of the light emission production unit is irradiating light by the initial operation. Do not execute. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game arcade manager and the like can separately confirm the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable auditorium, and thus can efficiently perform maintenance.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means is a light emitting source (light emitting member) installed in a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the operation of the movable auditorium itself and the light emitting operation of the light emitting effect means of the movable auditorium can be separately confirmed as the initial operation, maintenance can be performed efficiently as described above. Can be.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is an effect related to a fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) that fluctuates identification information (identification symbol, decoration special symbol, decoration first symbol A to C, this special figure). Is provided on the display device 41 (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (instruction) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light-emitting member thereof, or light-emitting members of the internal members 44c and 44d). The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable auditorium and the light emitting effect means by turning on the power of the gaming machine 10, and during the initial operation of the movable auditorium, the light emitting effect of the light emitting effect means. And does not execute the initial operation.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, movable members (internal members 44 c and 44 d) and light-emitting effect means (light guide plate 251 and its light-emitting members, or internal members) are provided as a plurality of members that perform effects related to the game. Since the initial operation of the light emitting members 44c and 44d) can be easily checked, maintenance can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light-emitting effecting means includes a light guide plate 251 in which a predetermined pattern emerges based on light irradiation from the end, and a light guide plate 251 facing the light guide plate 251. An irradiation unit (light emitting member of the light guide plate 251) that is provided at an end of the light plate 251 and that can irradiate the light guide plate 251 with light. The effect control means (effect control device 300) does not irradiate the irradiation means with light during the initial operation of the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10, a game arcade manager or the like can separately check the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable auditorium, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

[Ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to an effect of a variable display game before and after a power failure recovery.

[Timing chart of display mode of variable display game according to ninth embodiment]
FIG. 97 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the timing of the display mode (effect mode) of the variable display game before and after the return to the power failure according to the ninth embodiment.

  At time T81, if two start-up memories have a slippage hold and a hit hold in this order, a special display LED used to execute the shift display game when the shift display game based on the shift hold is started. (Special figure display (Special figure 1 display 51 and Special figure 2 display 52), light emitting unit) start emitting light (ON), and on the display screen of the display device 41, a decoration identification symbol (identification information, identification symbol, decoration) The variable display based on the special symbol, the first decorative symbols A to C, and the present symbol is started. Note that the off hold is a hold (starting memory) in which the display result (stop result) of the variable display game is in the off stop mode, and the hit hold is a hold when the display result of the variable display game is a big hit result (special result). It is.

  On the other hand, the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit state) but a normal gaming state, and the internal public works (44c, 44d) are stopped.

  Then, the power is turned off at time T82 due to the power failure, and after the power failure state continues until time T83, when the power is turned on (power recovery) at time T83, the variable display game based on the off-hold is restarted. The light emission of the LED starts again (ON). On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, a power failure recovery screen (startup screen) is displayed instead of the decorative identification symbol. After that, the initial operation control processing of the internal characters 44c and 44d is started with the power recovery, so that the initial operation of the internal characters 44c and 44d is performed as the first operation.

  Note that the game control device 100 (start storage unit) generates a power failure in a state where the start memory stored in the RAM includes a start memory in which the display result of the special figure change display game is a big hit result (special result). In such a case, the backup power supply unit 420 can hold the startup memory as the special result.

  At the time T84, when the variable display game based on the suspension is ended, the special figure LED is turned off (off). Note that the special figure LED may be made to emit light (turn on) in the state of the stoppage mode.

  Then, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed at time T85, the emission of the special figure LED starts (ON). On the display screen of the display device 41, when the power failure recovery screen ends, the decoration identification symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the variability display game based on the hit hold, and the reach effect is started. Thereafter, the effects of the internal characters 44c and 44d corresponding to the reach effect are executed as the reach operation (second operation).

  At the time T86, when the variable display game based on the hit hold ends, the special figure LED is turned off (off), and the reach operation of the internal characters 44c44d ends. Note that the special figure LED may be lit (turned on) in the state of the jackpot result mode (special result mode). Then, the decoration identification symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 stops the fluctuation display, and a big hit result mode (special result mode) such as “777” is displayed, and a fanfare effect from time T86 to time T87 (not shown). ), A big hit effect (big hit middle screen, big hit round effect) is started from time T87.

  When the big hit effect is started at the time T87, the gaming state becomes the big hit (big hit state, special game state), and the effects of the internal characters 44c and 44d corresponding to the big hit effect are set as the big hit operation (third operation). Be executed. As described above, in all of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation, the same internal movable objects 44c and 44d operate.

  In addition, when the initial operation (first operation) of the internal auditors products 44c and 44d is not completed when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed, the reaching operation (second operation) is performed. The operation may be skipped without being executed, and the operation during the big hit (the third operation) may be executed after the first operation.

  Further, when the power is turned on (restored power) at the time T83, the variable display game based on the off-hold may be restarted without restarting. In this way, by starting over from the beginning, even if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game based on the off-hold is short (in the case of fluctuation without reach), there is a margin of time, and during the fluctuation display game, the internal characters 44c and 44d are provided. Since the initial operation (first operation) is easily completed, the in-reach operation (second operation) can be executed without skipping after the initial operation.

  Note that the same movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) is operated in both the initial operation (first operation) and the reach operation (second operation), so that the movable role has a big hit. The middle operation (third operation) may not be executed. Further, the operation during the big hit (third operation) may be executed by another movable accessory (a movable accessory (for example, an external accessory 95a) other than the internal accessories 44c and 44d). According to such an aspect as well, the initial operation of the movable character is executed during the variable display game based on the loss hold, so that the reachable operation of the movable character immediately starts during the reach display of the variable display game based on the hit hold. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Operation and Effect of Ninth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that varies identification information (identification symbol, special decoration symbol, decoration identification symbol, decoration first symbol A to C, this special map). In the case where the display result is a special result (big hit result mode), a special game state (medium hit, big hit game state) that gives a game value to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 has a start-up memory (reservation) in which a variable display game is executed based on a movable role (internal role 44c, 44d) for performing a game effect and establishment of a start-up condition (for example, winning in a start winning port). Storage control (game control device 100) capable of storing the same, the control of the movable accessory, and the control of displaying the start storage display corresponding to the start storage (the special figure change holding display 643 and the holding display 633). Effect control means (effect control device 300) that can be executed. The start storage means holds the start memory having the special result when the power failure occurs in a state where the stored start memory includes the start memory having the display result of the variable display game as the special result. The effect control unit is configured to recover from the power failure when a power failure (power off) occurs in a state where the startup memory stored in the startup storage unit includes a startup memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result. The movable role is operated in a first operation (initial operation) later, and in a variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable role is operated in a second operation (operation during reach). In the special game state executed after the above operation, the movable accessory is operated by the third operation (big hit operation), and the same operation is performed in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation. Activate the movable character.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, the first operation (initial operation) of the movable auditorium (the internal auditoriums 44c, 44d) is performed after the power failure is restored (recovery of the power), whereby the second operation (reach) is performed. Since it is possible to immediately start the production of the movable accessory by the (middle action) or the third action (medium hit action), the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) stores the change display game (special figure change) in the start storage (hold) stored by the start storage means (game control device 100). In the case where a power failure (power off) occurs in a state where the display result of the display game includes a special result (big hit result mode), after the recovery from the power failure, the movable character (the internal character 44c, 44d) is operated by a first operation (initial operation), and in the variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable role is operated by a second operation (operation during reach), and the first operation is performed. , And in the second operation, the same movable accessory is operated. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second operation (reach) is performed by performing the first operation (initial operation) by the movable auditorium (the internal auditoriums 44c and 44d) after the power failure is restored (the power is restored). Since it is possible to immediately start the production of the movable role by the (middle operation), the interest of the game can be similarly improved.

[Tenth embodiment]
A tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to display of identification information (decorative special design, decorative identification design) when a big hit occurs.

[Example of Display Screen of Display Device According to Tenth Embodiment]
FIG. 98 shows the display device 41 when the identification information (identification symbol, special decoration symbol, decoration identification symbol, decoration first symbol A to C, and present special symbol) is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen.

  First, FIG. 98A shows that the stop result (display result) of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a big hit result mode (special result) when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, that is, during the first period. Mode), that is, the display screen of the display device 41 in the first display mode. Decoration first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 (the left area 610A (the left variable display area 610A), the right area 610B (the right variable display area 610B), and the middle area 610C (the central variable display area 610C)). The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c) are stopped in a jackpot result mode of, for example, "777", and the characters "! Jackpot!" Are displayed at the top of the display screen.

  In the decorative first symbols A to C of the first display mode, a character (tiger taro) and a character of the character name "tiger taro" are displayed together with the identification information (design) "7".

  Note that, when the variable display game results in a stop, the start memory (hold) corresponding to the variable display game is consumed, and the special figure in the reserved digestion area 640 (the specific display unit, the variable-hold display area) is changed. The suspension display 643 (start storage display, suspension display during special figure digestion) is not displayed. Although the hold display section 630 (start storage display section) and the hold display 633 (hold and start storage) are not displayed, the hold display section 630 may be displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 uses the decorative first symbols A to C of the first display mode to cause the character (tiger tiger, etc.) to perform a predetermined operation at the time of a temporary stop, thereby making a big hit symbol (for example, “777”). May be performed.

  Next, FIG. 98 (b) shows the result of stopping the variable display game (special figure variable display game) when the gaming state is a specific gaming state (probable change state, probability change state, time saving state), that is, during the second period. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when (display result) becomes the big hit result mode (special result mode), that is, the second display mode. The decorative first symbols A to C (left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, middle symbol 611c) of the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are stopped in a big hit result mode, for example, "777". And the characters "! Big Hit!" Are displayed at the top of the display screen. When the gaming state is the specific gaming state, for example, a right-turn instruction notification 691 that is an instruction to instruct to make a right-turn may be displayed in a lower right corner of the display screen. Further, similarly to the first display mode, the special figure change pending display 643 and the like are not displayed.

  In the decorative first symbols A to C of the second display mode, only the identification information (symbol) “7” is displayed in large size, and the character and the character of the character name are not displayed.

  FIG. 98 (c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state is the special gaming state (big hit state), that is, during the third period. On the display screen, a round effect is displayed as an operation related to the effect during the big hit. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 that displays the current number of jackpot rounds is displayed as, for example, “8 ROUND”.

  In addition, as the identification information (symbol) of the third display mode, the variable display area 610D (stop symbol display area 610D) in the lower left corner of the display screen displays a variable display game (special figure variable display) when the big hit result mode is achieved. Only one piece of identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the stop result (display result) of the game is displayed (for example, “7”). Therefore, by visually recognizing the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode, the player can confirm which symbol has a big hit during the round. As a result, the player can easily recognize the type of the specific game state (probable change state, probability fluctuation state, time saving state) to be shifted after the round from the symbol type (probably variable big hit symbol or normal big hit symbol) even during the round. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode may be displayed in substantially the same display mode as the first display mode or the second display mode. Not only during the round but also during the ending, the identification information (symbol) of the third display mode may be displayed on the display screen. Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be rendered such that the symbol is rotated as it is (eg, “7”). In addition, the identification information of the third display mode may be rotated about the axis while keeping the design (for example, “7”) as it is in the round.

  In any of the case where the big hit state (special result) occurs in the first display mode and the case where the big hit state occurs in the second display mode, the effect control device 300 sets the big hit game state (the special game state). During the (round, fanfare effect, ending effect)), the identification information (stop symbol 611d) can be displayed in the third display mode. Therefore, the player can check the stop symbol 611d each time the special game state is entered, and easily grasp in advance the advantageous states (specific game states and benefits) that occur after the end of the special game state. Become.

  Further, in any of the first to third display modes, the identification information (symbol) may be configured to include one or more common elements such that, for example, all the numerals of the symbol are displayed in red. Good.

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device according to the tenth embodiment]
FIG. 99 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the tenth embodiment, and the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result mode (big hit result mode). This is an example of a screen transition of the entire game from the time when the special game (big hit round) is started.

  FIG. 99 (b1) is the same as FIG. 98 (a). When the game state is the normal game state (during the first period), the stop result (display result) of the variable display game is a big hit result mode ( This is a display screen of the display device 41 in the special display mode, that is, the first display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b2), the effect control device 300 hides the decorative first symbols A to C in the first display mode. In addition, the effect control device 300, as part of the fanfare effect, displays the number (identification information, symbol) of the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) of the variable display area 610B displayed when the jackpot result mode is displayed. For example, the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D is displayed at a position where “7” is present. In addition, although the characters “! Big hit!” Are left at the top of the display screen, they may be hidden.

  Then, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 99 (b3), effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode in variable display area 610D to the lower center of the display screen. This allows the player to visually recognize the mode in which the “7” of the stop symbol 611d moves.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b4), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower left corner of the display screen by the start of the round. As a result, “7” is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen as in the stop symbol 611d in the third display mode described above with reference to FIG. 98C, and the round effect is started (“1 ROUND” is displayed). Is displayed).

  As described above, when the display result of the variable display game is the big hit result mode, in the place where the decorative first symbol B (the right symbol 611b) of the first display mode is displayed from the fanfare effect to the round effect, By displaying the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode and smoothly moving the stop symbol 611d to the lower left corner of the display screen as it is, the player can easily determine the type of the specific game state after the end of the round. Not only can be recognized, but also an effect with a visual effect can be performed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 99, in the place where the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) is displayed in the identification information (symbol) of the first display mode, the identification information of the third display mode (stop symbol 611d) is displayed. Is displayed and the stop symbol 611d is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. However, the decorative first symbol A (left symbol 611a) or the decorative first symbol C (middle symbol 611c) of the first display mode is displayed. A stop symbol 611d may be displayed at the displayed location, and the stop symbol 611d may be moved to the lower left corner of the display screen.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is directed to a fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game) that fluctuates identification information (identification symbols, special decoration symbols, decoration first symbols A to C, this special figure). Is provided on the display device 41 (effect control device 300). The effect control means displays the identification information in the first display mode (the big hit result mode in the normal gaming state (FIG. 98 (a))) during the first period (normal gaming state), and the second period In the middle (specific game state), the identification information is displayed in the second display mode (big hit result mode in the specific game state (FIG. 98 (b))), and the display result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit). During the special game state (big hit game state) in which a game value is given to the player when the state is changed, the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98 (c)). )).

  According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the identification information changes according to the gaming state, it is possible to notify whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be. Also, by displaying the identification information during the special game state, it is easy to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) generated after the end of the special game state.

  Also, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special map) as the first symbol. During the period (normal gaming state), a special result (big hit state) in the first display mode (big hit result mode in the normal gaming state (FIG. 98 (a))) and during the second period (specific In the case of a special result in the second display mode (the big hit result mode in the specific game mode (FIG. 98 (b))) in any of the second game mode (the game mode), during the special game mode (the big game mode) The identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special gaming state (FIG. 98 (c))). According to such a gaming machine 10, the special display is displayed in the first display mode. In any case where the special result is obtained in the second display mode, Since the identification information in the third display mode is displayed in the game status, the player easily grasp special game state after the end of the advantageous state (specific gaming state, privilege) generated in advance.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  The eleventh embodiment relates to a configuration mode (configuration mode) of a decoration special symbol and a variation mode (variation display mode) of a decoration special symbol of a decoration special symbol variation display game executed on the display device 41.

[Structure and variation of decorative special design]
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration mode and a variation mode of a decoration special design (decoration identification information, decoration design) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. On the display screen, a left symbol 611a (first identification information), a right symbol 611b (second identification information), and a middle symbol 611c (third identification information) can be variably displayed as decorative special symbols. . The variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the left variable display region 610A, the right variable display region 610B, and the central variable display region 610C, respectively. These variable displays are set as part of the variable effect by the effect control device 300 in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable effect setting process. Regarding the variation of the decoration special figure variation display game, variation before reaching is sometimes referred to as first variation, and variation after reaching (during reach) is sometimes referred to as second variation.

  As shown in (a1) of FIG. 100, in the fluctuation display before the reach state, that is, before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a includes a character image 612a (character component, character portion) indicating a character and a number (character). (Character component, character portion). Similarly, in the variable display before reach is established, the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b (character component, character portion) indicating a character and a character image 613b (character component, character portion) indicating a number. The numerals are characters representing numbers, and include Chinese numerals, Roman numerals, and the like in addition to Arabic numerals shown in the figure.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative special design includes a character and a number as an image, the character corresponds to the number in a one-to-one correspondence, and differs for each number. May be used.

  On the other hand, in (a1) the variable display before the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c displayed at the center is composed of only the character image 613c (character component, character portion) indicating a numeral. In this way, the middle symbol 611c is displayed smaller than the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and the central variable display region 610C is smaller (narrower) than the left variable display region 610A and the right variable display region 610B. ). Therefore, on the display screen, an area other than the variable display area 610 is expanded, and an effect area for performing an effect other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the middle symbol 611c is composed of only the character image 613c indicating a number and is small, it does not overlap with the left symbol 611a or the right symbol 611b (or the left variable display area 610A or the right variable display area 610B), The player can easily visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, in (A1), one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be composed of only character images 613a and 613b showing numbers, in addition to the middle symbol 611c. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 on the display screen is further expanded.

  In order to impress a character on a player, if three decorative special symbols of a left symbol 611a, a right symbol 611b, and a middle symbol 611c each include a character image indicating a character, three decorative special symbols are formed. The display screen occupies most of the display screen of the display device 41, and there is a possibility that the effect cannot be effectively displayed outside the variable display area 610.

  Further, before the reach of (A1) is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of nine symbols (decorative identification symbols) corresponding to numbers from 1 to 9 appear on the display screen in order and cross the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction). After moving, it disappears from the display screen. Note that the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be variably displayed by a horizontal scroll in which a series of a plurality of symbols move in the horizontal direction.

  On the other hand, before the reach of (A1) is established, the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) is the left symbol 611a (first identification information) and the right symbol 611b (second identification information) and the direction of the variable display. Are displayed differently with the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate around the axis. The rotation variation is not limited to a mode in which one symbol rotates, but may be a mode in which a series of a plurality of symbols is switched and displayed each time the symbol rotates. In addition, instead of rotation fluctuation, a series of overlapping symbols can be shown in perspective so that a plurality of symbols move in the front-back direction (back-and-forth scrolling), or simply a series of symbols can be sequentially switched at the same position. The switching change to be displayed or the swinging variation such that one symbol swings slightly may be performed.

  In addition, the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c (the longitudinal fluctuation, the switching fluctuation, and the fluctuation fluctuation is also possible) is a fluctuation in which the symbol does not cross the display screen. There is no need for a wide variable display area extending in one direction (scroll direction) as in the area 610A or the right variable display area 610B. Therefore, due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the center fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area in which an effect other than the variable display is performed, and it is easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, in (A1), at the bottom of the display screen, two hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630 corresponding to the hold (here, the first start storage). Further, a reserved digestion area 640 of a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the running special figure fluctuating display game (starting memory that has been the right to execute this special figure fluctuating display game) is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. However, due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller and does not overlap with the hold display section 630 or the hold digestion area 640. Therefore, the middle symbol 611c also overlaps the hold display 633 or the fluctuating hold display 633a. Without this, the visibility of the middle symbol 611c, the holding display 633, or the changing holding display 633a becomes good, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) “2”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold (second The number "0" is displayed.

  As shown in (A2) of FIG. 100, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and fluctuate, so that the vertical scroll before the reach is established fluctuates ( That is, the mode of the variable display is changed. Note that the configuration of the left symbol 611a does not change, and the left symbol 611a is composed of a character image 612a indicating a character and a character image 613a indicating a number as in (a). Similarly, the configuration of the right symbol 611b does not change, and the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b indicating a character and a character image 613b indicating a number, as in (A1). However, the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is smaller than before reaching (before temporary stop).

  On the other hand, when the reach is established in (A2), the middle symbol 611c is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scroll, and the change mode is changed from the change display by the rotation change before the reach is established. In addition, the direction of the variable display of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the direction of the variable display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the vertical direction or the vertical direction of the display screen) and corresponds. (The direction of the variable display is aligned). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the player's uncomfortable feeling due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, and to give the player a surprise to enhance the interest of the game. In (a2), a series of middle symbols 611c and a middle symbol 611c 'of numeral 6 are shown in a series of symbols (decoration identification symbols) moving on the display screen by vertical scrolling. I have.

  Further, when the reach is established in (A2), the configuration of the middle symbol 611c is changed and changed, and the character image 612c showing the character and the character image showing the numeral are changed from the configuration before the reach is established only with the character image 613c. 613c. Therefore, the configuration of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the configuration of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and these three (three types) decorative special symbols have commonality to eliminate the sense of incongruity of the player. In addition, the player can be surprised to enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player pays attention to the middle pattern 611c (611c ') in which the character image 612c (612c') is added and changed to a new configuration, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, such as the fact that a reach has been established. .

  Since the entire size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is reduced before the reach is established (before the temporary stop), the middle symbol 611c composed of the character image 612c and the character image 613c is displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling. Also, there is no overlap between the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (or the left variable display area 610A and the right variable display area 610B).

  In addition, before the reach is established and after the reach is established, the small symbol, which is a decorative special symbol that is variably displayed in the small variability display area 615, does not change in the configuration mode and the variance mode, and may provide a sense of security to the player. it can. The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are set as large symbols, and are variably displayed in the small variable display region 615 as compared with the large symbol variable display region 610, and a small special symbol that is smaller than the large symbol is displayed. And The small design may be the above-mentioned fourth special design (fourth design).

[Modifications of the configuration and variation of the decorative special symbol]
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a variation example of the variation mode of the decorative special symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Configurations other than the configuration described below are common to both FIG. 101 and FIG. 100.

  In (A1) of FIG. 101, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before reach is changed from (A1) of FIG. 100.

  As shown in (a1), in the fluctuation display before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a is composed of only the character image 613a indicating a numeral. The right symbol 611b is composed of only a character image 613b indicating a numeral. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate around the axis. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used.

  In (A1), the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B are smaller (narrower) than the center fluctuation display area 610C due to the rotation fluctuation of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area in which an effect other than the variable display is performed, and it is easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, in (a), in the fluctuation display before reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is composed of a character image 612c indicating a character and a character image 613c indicating a number. The middle symbol 611c is displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling.

  In (a) of FIG. 101, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and fluctuate, so that the variation mode is changed from the rotational variation before the reach is established. Change. Further, the configuration of the left symbol 611a is changed and changed, and changes from the configuration before the reach of only the character image 613a is established to the configuration of the character image 612a indicating the character and the character image 613a indicating the numeral. . In addition, the configuration of the right symbol 611b is also changed and changed, and changes from the configuration before the reach of only the character image 613b is established to the configuration of the character image 612b showing the character and the character image 613b showing the number. . By changing the configuration of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in (a2), when reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed due to rotational fluctuation, and the fluctuation mode is changed from the fluctuation display by vertical scroll before reach is established. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used. The direction of the variable display of the middle symbol 611c corresponds to the direction of the variable display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the circumferential direction around the axis). The change in the variation of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c can surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

  Similarly, in (A2), the center fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area in which an effect other than the variable display is performed, and it is easy to visually recognize the variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Reference table]
The table in FIG. 102A is a reference table that is referred to by the effect control device 300 in, for example, steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable effect setting process. Such a reference table is stored in a storage unit (a memory such as the RAM 322 or the FeRAM 323) of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 refers to the table in FIG. 102A and sets the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol as part of the variation effect. The table in FIG. 102A corresponds to the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 can determine from the variation pattern types (B1904, B2001) whether or not there is a reach in the decorative special figure variation display game to be executed. When there is a reach, that is, when a reach occurs, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before the reach is established and after the reach is established are set as shown in the table of FIG. 102A. Thus, as shown in FIG. 100, when the reach is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the vertical scroll before the reach is established to the temporary stop state, but the configuration including the numbers and characters is not changed. When the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c changes from vertical rotation to rotational fluctuation before the reach is established, and changes from a configuration including only numbers to a configuration including numbers and characters.

  In the present embodiment, before the reach is established, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol do not change from the start of the decoration special figure variation display game to the reach establishment, but a configuration in which the decoration special symbol is changed is also possible. That is, it is only necessary that the configuration mode and the configuration mode before the reach as shown in the table of FIG.

  When there is no reach, that is, when no reach occurs, as shown in the table of FIG. 102A, from the start to the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set so as not to change. From the start to the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by vertical scroll, and the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by rotation variation.

  Note that a configuration is also possible in which the effect control device 300 determines the variation mode of the decoration identification symbol by lottery. For example, when there is no reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a high winning probability and may be rotated and changed with a low winning probability (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). Conversely, if there is reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a low winning probability and rotated and fluctuated with a high winning probability before reaching is established (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). . In this way, at the time of starting the decoration special figure variation display game, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of the reach and, consequently, the degree of expectation of the big hit by the rotation variation (variation mode) of the middle symbol 611c. That is, if there is a rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the player can expect the occurrence of the reach and the occurrence of the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, a configuration in which the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set according to a game state such as a normal game state or a time saving / probable change state (specific game state) is also possible. For example, in the time-saving / probable change state where the change time is short, it is difficult to understand even if the configuration mode and the change mode of the decorative special symbol change. You may set so that it may not change. In addition, since the decorative special figure 2 variable display game frequently occurs in the time reduction / probable change state and the variable time is shortened, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game starts the decorative special figure variable display game regardless of the reach. The configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol may be set so as not to be changed from to the end. That is, the configuration and the variation mode of the special decoration symbol may be set to be changed before and after the reach is established only in the decoration special figure 1 variation display game.

  Furthermore, according to the reach system (N reach, SP reach, etc.) known from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol after the reach is established may be set. In this way, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be notified by the configuration mode and the variation mode of the special decoration symbol.

  FIG. 102B is a modification example of the lookup table corresponding to FIG. 101. According to this reference table, as shown in FIG. 101, when the reach is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established to the temporary stop state, and the configuration is changed from a configuration including only numerals to a numeral. Changes to one that includes the character. When the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c changes from vertical scrolling before the reach is established to rotational fluctuation, and changes from a configuration including numbers and characters to a configuration including only numbers. When there is no reach (when no reach occurs), as shown in the table of FIG. 102B, from the start to the end of the decorative special figure variation display game, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set so as not to change.

  In FIGS. 102A and 102B, one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b before reach is established may have the same configuration and variation as the middle symbol 611c. In this case, an area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen before the reach is established.

〔Screen transition〕
FIGS. 103A and 103B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the eleventh embodiment.

  (C1) of FIG. 103A is a display screen at the time of starting the decoration special figure variation display game. As a result of the previous stoppage of the decorative special figure variation display game, the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the variation display area 610. In addition, three small symbols are displayed in the small fluctuation display area 615. Then, the hold display 633 displayed in response to the hold (here, the first start storage) moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the hold display unit 630 is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. Moves (pending shift). Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) changes from “3” to “2”, and in the special figure 2 hold number display 660, the current special figure 2 hold The number “0” of (second start memory) is displayed.

  (C2) of FIG. 103A is the same as (A1) of FIG. 100, but the fluctuation of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c as the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is displayed in the variation display area 610. The variation is being executed, and the variation of the small symbol as the decoration reduction symbol is being executed in the variation display area 615. Note that the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are larger in size and fluctuated by vertical scrolling than the stopped symbol, which is the stop result of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the reach of (c1) has occurred (configuration). The aspect does not change). Also, the middle symbol 611c changes from the stop symbol configuration mode (consisting of the character image 612c and the character image 613c), which is the stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game in which the reach of (c1) has occurred, and indicates a number. The rotation is changed in a configuration mode including only the character image 613c.

  As shown in (C3) and (C4), after the fluctuation display is continued, a reach occurs as shown in (C5) of FIG. 103A, and the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped (shake variation). At the same time, the configuration and variation of the middle symbol 611c change. Note that (C5) in FIG. 103A is the same as (A2) in FIG. 100, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Subsequently, as shown in (c6), after the reach fluctuation has continued, as shown in (c7), in addition to the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, the middle symbol 611c is also temporarily stopped (oscillating variation) to 3 One symbol temporarily stops (swaying fluctuation). Thereafter, as in (c8), the three symbols are completely stopped, and the missing symbols are displayed.

  In the out-of-stop design of (c8), the size of the left design 611a and the right design 611b is larger than the size of the decoration design at the time of (c7) temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation). Also, the middle symbol 611c changes from the configuration mode (consisting of the character image 612c and the character image 613c) at the time of the temporary stop (shake fluctuation) of (C7), and changes to the configuration mode consisting of only the character image 613c indicating a number. I do.

  Thereafter, in (c9), the decorative special figure variation display game is executed again. Then, since the reach does not occur after the decorative special figure variation display game is continued as in (C10), in (C11), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are as follows. The change stop symbol is displayed without any change.

  As described above, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol have been described. However, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, even if the reach is not established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped. Alternatively, the configuration and variation of the middle symbol 611c may be changed. The pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo variation (sub-variation) that temporarily and temporarily stops (pseudo stop) the decorative special symbol that is fluctuated and displayed from the start to the end of one special figure fluctuating display game. Is performed continuously a predetermined number of times. At the time of the temporary stop, a pseudo continuous symbol indicating a pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed as a middle symbol 611c.

  In addition, the configuration of the decorative special symbol is not only a mode consisting of only a character image or a mode consisting of a character image and a character image, but also a mode consisting of a character image and a frame image surrounding the character image, and a mode comprising a character image and a character image. A mode including a frame image (a character image and a character image) may be included. Further, a configuration using another image such as a frame image instead of the character image is also possible.

[Operation and Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 transmits the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a), the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b), and the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c). An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the variable display game for performing the variable display on the display device 41 is provided. The effect control means can display, on the display device 41, the first identification information or the second identification information of a configuration including a component (character image) indicating a character and a component (character image) indicating a number. . The effect control means outputs the first identification information and the second identification information together with the third identification information of a configuration mode including a component (character image) indicating a number and not including a component (character image) indicating a character. , Can be displayed on the display device 41.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, since the third identification information (for example, the middle design 611c) includes a component (character image) indicating a number and does not include a component (character image) indicating a character, On the display screen of the display device 41, an area other than the variable display area 610 for displaying each identification information is expanded. Therefore, in this widened area, an effect area for performing an effect other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is composed of only character images indicating numbers and is small, the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b) , And the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) can be displayed without overlapping each other, and the player can easily visually recognize the variable display of each identification information, and the interest of the game is improved. Therefore, in order to make the player recognize a character such as a character, which is a motif of the effect of the gaming machine 10, the character image is displayed with the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) or the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). ), The variable display game can be reliably executed on the display device 41.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes and displays the configuration of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) when the reach is established for the variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the player pays attention to the third identification information changed to the new configuration, the player can easily understand the progress of the game, such as the achievement of the reach.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) sets the change mode of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) as the change mode before the reach is established for the variable display game. The first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b) are different from each other. Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) temporarily stops the first identification information and the second identification information when a reach is established with respect to the variable display game, and changes the variation mode of the third identification information to the first. The first identification information and the second identification information are made to correspond to the variation before the temporary stop.

  Therefore, before the reach is established, the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is the same as that of the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). The sense of incongruity of the player due to being different from the direction of the variable display decreases when the reach is established. Further, by changing the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c), the player can be surprised and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components having the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  The twelfth embodiment relates to a hitting method for notifying a player of a particular hitting method such as left-handing or right-handing so as to recommend (or instruct, guide, or notify) the player. The hitting method is, as described above, a firing mode of the ball firing device, and corresponds to an area where it is recommended to fire a game ball in the game area 32 and cause it to flow down. The hitting information for notifying the hitting information includes, in particular, a hitting instruction display such as a right-hit instruction display 657, 658 or a left-hit instruction display 659 displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, or an indirect identification. Mode display 645 for recommending how to hit to the player.

  The right-handed notification of the hitting notification recommends to the player to shoot a game ball to a right area (first game area) which is an area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Left strike notification (normal strike notification) of the hitting information is recommended to the player to shoot a game ball to a left area (second game area) which is an area on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. .

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is recommended that a game ball be fired to the left area of the gaming area 32, and left-handed information for recommending left-handed is reported to the player. In the special game state (big hit state, small hit state), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a specific game state (time saving state or probable change state), a game ball is fired in the right area of the game area 32. Is recommended, and right-handed information for recommending right-handed is notified to the player.

[Main processing (effect controller)]
The main process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the effect control device 300. The main process in FIG. 104 is obtained by adding step B0014a to the main process in FIG. Note that the same processes as those in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof is omitted.

  In step B0014a, based on the game state determined from the command received in the received command check process in step B0014, a hitting notification process for notifying the player of a left hit or a right hit is executed.

[Notification of hitting]
FIG. 105 illustrates details of the hitting notification process (B0014a) in the above-described main process (FIG. 104). FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a hitting notification process performed by effect controller 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is a special gaming state (big hit state or the like) or a time saving / probable change state (specific gaming state) (B3501). When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (result of B3501 is “N”), the hitting notification process is terminated.

  The effect control device 300 includes information on the hit command received most recently, information on the symbol command received most recently (special figure type of B1801 and symbol type of B1802), and the number of continuations of the probable change state (for example, 50 times or more). From the next time), the number of continuation of the time reduction state (for example, 70 times), the number of executions of the special figure change display game after the end of the big hit, the probability information (B1313), etc., the current game state is the normal game state, the special game state ( Big hit state, etc.), a probable change state, or a time saving state. From the symbol type of B1802, it is possible to know whether it is a probable variable jackpot that is in a probable change state after the end of the big hit or a normal big hit that is in a time saving state after the end of the big hit. Further, the current gaming state can also be determined from an effect mode (B1318) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state.

  If the current game state is a special game state (big hit state or the like) or a time saving / probable change state (specific game state) (result of B3501 is “Y”), effect control device 300 performs Then, a setting is made to display the right strike instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode among the strike instruction indications on the display device 41 (B3502). Next, it is determined whether or not it is after the predetermined timing (B3503). If it is not after the predetermined timing (the result of B3503 is “N”), the hitting notification process ends.

Here, the predetermined timing is the timing at the start of the jackpot ending, the start of the time saving / probable change state, or the timing in the middle of the time reduction / probable change state. The start of the big hit ending is when the ending command is received (B2111). The time saving / probable change state starts when a variable command (variable command) is received for the first time after the ending command is received (B1206). In the present embodiment, any of the time saving state and the probable change state always occurs after the end of the big hit state. The timing in the middle of the time saving / probable change state is, for example, when a variable command (variable command) is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the start of the time reduction / probable change state.

  On the other hand, when it is the predetermined timing or later (result of B3503 is “Y”), effect control device 300 displays a mode display (second display) corresponding to the current game state as beating method notification on display device 41. Is set (B3504), and the hitting notification process ends. The mode of the mode display may correspond to an effect mode reflecting the probable change state.

  With such a hitting notification process, a right-hitting instruction display 657 (first display) is provided as right-hitting notification that recommends a player to launch a game ball to the right area (first gaming area) of the gaming area 32. The mode display (second display) can be displayed on the display device 41. In addition, if the current game state known from the mode display is the time saving / probable change state (specific game state), the player can recognize that the player should right-hand, so that the mode display is also a right-hand notification. Therefore, the right-handed notification can be reliably executed by both the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) and the mode display (second display).

  By the processing in steps B3501 and B3502, the right-handed instruction display 657 is continuously displayed in the special game state and the time saving / probable change state (specific game state) to which the transition is made after the special game state. Therefore, by the right-handed instruction display 657, it is possible to continuously execute the right-handed notification for a necessary period (special game state and the time saving / probable change state), and the player may overlook the right-handed notification. There is no.

  Further, by the processing of steps B3503 and B3504, the mode display (second display) is performed after a predetermined timing (at the end of the special game state, at the start of the specific game state, or during the specific game state). Will be displayed. By displaying the mode display, the player can grasp the probable change state and the ordinary power support state and can recognize that the game ball is fired in the right area, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Also, if the predetermined timing is at the end of the special game state or at the start of the time saving / probable change state, the mode display can be displayed during an appropriate period. Also, if the predetermined timing is in the middle of the time saving / probable change state, the ending effect at the end of the special game state and the effect at the start of the specific game state are avoided, and the mode display is performed without disturbing other effects. Can be displayed.

[Single command processing]
The one-shot command processing (B1212) according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a single-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38). The single command processing in FIG. 106 is obtained by adding steps B1333 and B1334 to the single command processing in FIG. Note that the same processes as those in FIG. 39 are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof is omitted.

  If the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is "N"), effect controller 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a hitting instruction command (B1333). The hitting instruction command is a right-turn instruction notification command (A2705) or a left-turn instruction notification command (A7703). If the MODE unit does not represent the hitting instruction command (result of B1333 is "N"), the one-shot command processing ends.

  When the MODE unit indicates a hitting instruction command (result of B1333 is “Y”), effect controller 300 executes a hitting instruction receiving process that is a process when the hitting instruction command is received (B1334). ), And terminates the single command processing.

[Processing when receiving hitting instruction]
FIG. 107 illustrates details of the hitting instruction receiving process (B1334) in the above-described single command processing (FIG. 106). FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a hitting notification process performed by effect controller 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B3701). If the command in the MODE section is not a normal command (result of B3701 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the hitting instruction is ended.

  If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (result of B3701 is “Y”), effect controller 300 determines whether or not a right-stroke instruction notification command has been received among the striking instruction commands, that is, the received strike command. It is determined whether the direction instruction command is a right strike instruction notification command (B3702). When the right-handing instruction notification command is received (result of B3702 is “Y”), right-handing instruction display 658 (first display) in a special mode is set to be displayed (B3703), and the processing at the time of receiving the right-handing instruction is ended.

  When a left-handing instruction notification command is received among the hitting instruction commands (result of B3702 is “N”), left-handing instruction display 659 (third display) of the hitting instruction display is set as the hitting instruction display. (B3704), and terminates the hitting instruction receiving process.

〔Screen transition〕
108A to 108C are screen transition diagrams illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the twelfth embodiment.

  (D) in FIG. 108A is a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variable display game in the variable display area 610. Here, the special figure change display game is the special figure 1 change display game. A fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold on the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Also, one suspension display 633 is displayed on the suspension display unit 630a corresponding to the suspension (here, the first start storage) relating to the special figure change display game before execution. The hold display unit 630a displays a hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold (second The number "0" is displayed.

  After that, in (D2), the special decoration variable display game ends, and the big hit stop symbols “3, 3, 3” corresponding to the big hit results are derived. Here, the pending change display 633a has been deleted.

  Subsequently, in (D3), a big hit fanfare effect is executed, and "big congratulations !!" is displayed at the center of the display screen, and the big hit stop symbol "3,3,3" moves to the upper left corner. It is displayed small. In addition, the following description will be made on the assumption that the big hit stop symbol is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the big hit state (special game state) starts when the effect control device 300 receives the big hit fanfare command and starts the big hit fanfare effect.

  Further, in (D3), the right-handing instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 41 by the process of step B3502 of the hitting notification process (FIG. 105). In the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode, a character image 657a indicating a character “right-handed” (character display) and a graphic image 657b indicating an arrow graphic (or symbol) “⇒” (graphic display) are displayed collectively. Things. In the big hit state (special game state), it is advantageous to launch a game ball to the right area of the game area 32 where the special variable winning device 39 exists. For this reason, it is recommended (instruction, guidance) that the player launches the game ball in the right area (first game area) by the right strike instruction display 657 of the hitting information.

  The entire image of the right strike instruction display 657 is a combination of the character image 657a and the graphic image 657b, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Alternatively, when displaying the right-handing instruction display 657, the character image 657a and the graphic image 657b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handing instruction display 657.

  Subsequently, in (D4) and (D5), a big hit round starts, and a big hit round effect is executed from one round to six rounds. Here, the big hit is a 6R probability variable big hit, and the big hit round is up to six rounds, but the right-handed instruction display 657 is continuously displayed from one round to six rounds.

  Thereafter, in (D6), a big hit ending effect is executed. Also in this case, a right-handed instruction display 657 of a normal mode including a character image 657a “right-handed” indicating a character and a graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating a figure of an arrow is continuously displayed.

  Next, in (D) of FIG. 108B, the probable change state starts in the time saving / probable change state. Also in this case, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is continuously displayed (B3502). In the probable change state (high probability state), general-purpose support is executed, so that it is advantageous to cause the general-purpose start gate 34 to pass a game ball and execute the general-purpose change display game. For this reason, it is advantageous to fire a game ball in the right area of the game area 32 where the general-purpose starting gate 34 exists. Therefore, the player is recommended (instructed, guided) to right-hit the game ball in the right area (first gaming area) by the right-hit instruction display 657 of the hitting instruction display.

  In (d), since it is a predetermined timing (here, at the start of the specific game state), the probable change state (probability) of the current game state is determined by the process of step B3504 of the hitting notification process (FIG. 105). A mode display 645 indicating “variation state” (“probability variation mode has entered!” (Second display, character image)) is displayed large in the center of the display screen together with the right-handing instruction display 657. The mode display 645 may simply be a character image “probability variation mode”.

  In (D7), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display unit 630b corresponding to the hold (here, the second start storage) relating to the special figure change display game before execution. The hold display unit 630b displays a hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) “0”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold (second The number "1" is displayed.

  Then, in (d8), the hold shift is executed, the decoration special figure change display game starts, and the change hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Is displayed. Here, the special figure change display game is a special figure 2 change display game. Also, a mode display 645 “probability variation mode” (second display) indicating the probability change state is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner of the display screen together with the right-handing instruction display 657, and at the start of the probability change state (specific game state). Changes form. The mode display 645 recommends (instructs) the player to right-hand by indicating that the player is in the probable change state. The right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decoration special symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Next, in (D9), the player performs left-handing despite the fact that right-handing is recommended by the right-handing instruction display 657. For this reason, when a game ball is awarded to the starting winning opening 36 (the second predetermined area) by flowing down the left area, a right strike instruction notification command (A2705) from the game control apparatus 100 is sent to the effect control apparatus 300. (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, by the process of step B3703 of the process for receiving a hitting instruction (FIG. 107), a right-handing instruction display 658 (first display) in a special mode is displayed at a center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. The right-handed instruction display 658 of the special mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decorative special symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game.

  The entire image of the right-stroke instruction display 658 is a combination of a character image 658a “right-stroke” indicating a character and a graphic image 658b “⇒” indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow. It is stored in the ROM 325. Alternatively, when displaying the right-handing instruction display 658, the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handing instruction display 658.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handing instruction display 658 in the special mode is similar in shape to the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode and differs only in size, but is not limited thereto, and is not similar to the right-handing instruction display 657. Different shapes may be used. The right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode may have the same shape as that of the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode, and may differ only in color.

  If the player is performing left-handing even though right-handing is recommended (instruction), the player is strongly recommended (instructed) to right-hand by the right-handing instruction display 658 in a special mode. . Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed so as to be more conspicuous than the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode. Further, both the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode and the right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) in the special mode which is larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode enhance the player. You can recommend (instruct) right-handed.

  Further, in (D9), there is no change in the mode display 645 “probability variation mode” indicating the probable change state. There is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-stroke instruction display 657, and both the character image 657a “right-stroke” indicating a character and the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating an arrow graphic are displayed in the same upper right corner. Will be displayed continuously at the corner of. However, under a predetermined condition (a predetermined case) in which the right-handing instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed, the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode does not interfere with the display area of the display screen. In order to secure, only the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating the graphic of the arrow may be displayed on the display screen.

  Next, in (D10), the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period, and then deleted. Also, here, a hold (second start memory) is generated by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening), and a hold display 633 corresponding to this hold is generated. On the other hand, a hold change notice (pre-reading effect) is executed, and a hold display 633b changed from a normal mode (for example, white) to a suggestion mode (for example, green) indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high is displayed. The hold change notice is executed by the process of step B1716 of the prefetch change command process (FIG. 41) when the expectation of the big hit of the special figure change display game related to the hold is high.

  In (D10), in response to the change to the suggestion mode and the high expectation (reliability) of the hold, the effect control device 300 displays the mode display 645 “probability variation mode” in the display mode (shape and shape). Although the size and color) are changed from the normal mode to the special mode, the display mode (display position and mode) of the right-handed instruction display 657 is maintained. As described above, since the mode display 645 changes in accordance with the degree of expectation of the big hit, the interest of the game increases.

  Instead of the degree of expectation of suspension, the display mode of the mode display 645 “probability fluctuation mode” may be changed in response to the high degree of expectation of the jackpot of the currently running special figure fluctuation display game.

  Subsequently, in (d), SP reach is generated and the SP reach effect (predetermined effect) is executed at the center position on the screen. The mode display 645 “probability variation mode” is not displayed to secure the effect display area for the SP reach effect. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed in a wide area of the display screen, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  After that, by executing the special figure change display game several times, in (D12), the special figure change display game is executed for the number of times (for example, 50) of the continuation of the certain change state from the start of the certain change state. , The probable change state ends, and “probability change mode end” is displayed. In this example, the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine.

  As described above, the display mode (display position and form) of the right-hand instruction display 657 (first display) does not change through the special game state and the subsequent time saving / probable change state (specific game state), and is always a constant display. It is displayed continuously in a manner. On the other hand, the mode display 645 (second display) that recommends the player to right-hand by indicating that the player is in the probable change state changes the display mode according to the situation as in (D7) and (D10). (D), the display may be switched to the non-display state and displayed intermittently.

  Note that, through the special game state and the subsequent time saving / probable change state, the right-handed instruction display 657 does not always have to be in a fixed display mode, and may be gradually displayed with a lapse of time or the display position may change. . In order to prevent a situation in which the player stops playing and takes a break in the time saving / probable change state, when both the hold display 633 and the change hold display 633a disappear, the mode display 645 (second display) is performed. You may be prompted to play the game by blinking.

  Thereafter, in (D13) of FIG. 108C, the normal game state starts in place of the probable change state, and the recommended hitting style changes from right to left. At the start of the normal game state, the game control device 100 may transmit a left-turn instruction notification command. When the effect control device 300 receives the left-turning instruction notification command (B1334 in FIG. 106), the process proceeds to step B3704 of the process for receiving a hitting instruction (FIG. 107) to display the left-turning instruction display 659 as the hitting instruction display. It is displayed at a center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. The left-handing instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handing instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right-handing instruction display 658 (second image) in the special mode. It is almost the same size as. Therefore, the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed so as to be conspicuously large. The left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed on the front side in preference to the decorative special symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game.

  The entire image of the left-handed instruction display 659 is a combination of a character image 659a “left-handed” indicating a character and a graphic image 659b indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Have been. Alternatively, when displaying the left-handing instruction display 659, the character image 659a and the graphic image 659b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the left-handing instruction display 659.

  In (d13), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display unit 630a corresponding to the hold related to the special figure change display game before execution. The hold display unit 630a displays a hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. A fluctuating hold display 633a indicating a hold on the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold (second The number "0" is displayed.

  After that, in (D14), the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed.

  Then, in (D15), the player performs right-handing despite the normal gaming state in which left-handing is recommended. Then, when a game ball has passed through the right area to the general-purpose starting gate 34 (first predetermined area), a left-turn instruction notification command (A7703) from the game control apparatus 100 is sent to the effect control apparatus 300. (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, by the process of step B3704 of the hitting instruction receiving process (FIG. 107), a left-hitting instruction display 659 is displayed at a center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. Again, the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) in the special mode. Image). Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed so as to be conspicuously large.

  Next, in (D16), the left-turn instruction display 659 (third display) displayed for a predetermined period is deleted.

  In the screen transition described above, at the start of the big hit state of (D3), the game control device 100 transmits a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and similarly to (D9), the effect control device The display 300 may display a right-handed instruction display 658 in a special mode.

[Operation and Effect of Twelfth Embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) for displaying the identification information in a variable manner. The gaming machine 10 can generate a normal game state, a special game state (for example, a big hit state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a specific game state (time saving / probable change state). Further, the gaming machine 10 may fire a game ball in a first game area (a right area of the game area 32) where it is recommended to fire a game ball in a special game state and a specific game state, and in a normal game state. A recommended second game area (the left area of the game area 32). The effect control means can display a first display (right-handed instruction display) and a second display (mode display) on the display device 41 as a display for recommending a player to shoot a game ball to the first game area. It is. The effect control means continuously displays the first display (right-handed instruction display) in the special game state and in the specific game state to which the transition is made after the special game state. The effect control means displays the second display (mode display) from the end of the special game state, from the start of the specific game state, or from the middle of the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, a right-handed notification can be reliably executed by the first display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display), and at the end of the special game state or a specific game. The second display (mode display) can be displayed at the start of the state or at an appropriate period after the middle of the specific game state. For this reason, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) includes the first image (the right-handing instruction display 657 in the normal mode) and the second image (the special image) larger than the first image. The first display (right-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 by the right-handed instruction display 658 of the embodiment. Further, the effect control means displays a third display (left-handed instruction display) for recommending to the player that a game ball is fired in the second game area by a third image larger than the first image. Can be displayed.

  Therefore, both the first image (the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode) and the second image (the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode) larger than the first image give the player a first game area ( It is possible to strongly recommend (instruct) the player to fire the game ball in the right area). Further, the third display (left-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 so as to be conspicuously large.

  Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) flows down the first game area (right area) to the first predetermined area (general figure start gate 34) in the normal game state. When a ball has passed, a third display (left-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. In the special game state or the specific game state, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) flows down the second game area (left area) and the game ball passes through the second predetermined area (start winning opening 36). In this case, the first display (right-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, when a game ball is fired toward a game area that is not recommended in the current game state between the first game area and the second game area, a first display (right-hand instruction display) or a third display is issued as a warning. (Left-handed instruction display) can be displayed.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
A thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for components having the same functions as those of the first to twelfth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

  The thirteenth embodiment relates to a relentless reporting effect for relentlessly reporting one piece of information. The relentless notification effect is executed on a display device such as the display device 41 (a sub-display device other than the display device 41) under the control of the effect control device 300. In the present embodiment, in particular, the hitting information of the twelfth embodiment will be described as an example of information, and the hitting information effect for notifying the hitting information will be described as an example of a persistent information effect.

  The hitting information given as an example in the present embodiment is particularly a hitting instruction display ((d9) in FIG. 108B, FIG. 108C) displayed when the player executes a hitting method different from the recommended hitting method. (Refer to (D15)), or a hitting instruction display (see (D13) in FIG. 108B) displayed when the recommended hitting style changes due to a change in the game state.

  In the following, a relentless notification effect of notifying right-handing information for recommending right-handing by using a right-handing instruction display 658 in a special mode in the hitting instruction display will be described. As described below, the mode of relentless notification production is characterized by a plurality of parameters.

[Form of the image itself (first parameter)]
FIG. 109 is a diagram exemplifying a form of the image of the right-handing instruction display 658 itself as a first parameter (first factor) defining and characterizing the effect of the relentless notification effect by the right-handing instruction display 658. Here, the form includes a shape, a pattern, and a color. The image of the entire right-handing instruction display 658 can be impressed to the player by the form of the image itself as the first parameter.

  (A), (B), and (C) of FIG. 109 each show an example of the form of the image of the right-handing instruction display 658. (A), (B) and (C) have particularly different shapes, but may have different colors and patterns. The effect control device 300 not only uses the image (one of (A), (B), and (C)) of the right-hand instruction display 658 in a certain form stored in the image ROM 325, but also uses (A) A plurality of images of the right-handing instruction display 658 having different forms as in (B) and (C) may be stored in the image ROM 325 and appropriately selected.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the image of the right-handed instruction display 658 includes a character image 658a indicating the character “Right-handed”, a graphic image 658b indicating an arrow, and a frame image 658c indicating a graphic of a frame. The frame image 658c that is geometrically adapted to the graphic image 658b contacts the outer periphery of the graphic image 658b and surrounds the graphic image 658b. Therefore, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c are displayed integrally. The frame image 658c is not limited to this, and may have another shape surrounding the character image 658a and / or the graphic image 658b (see FIGS. 113 (B1) to (B3) described later). Note that the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be referred to as a first image, a second image, and a third image, respectively.

  The colors of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be multicolor (a plurality of colors) or a single color, but this embodiment shows a case of multicolor. In the case of multi-color, each image is painted in a plurality of colors that differ depending on the location. Further, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may have a predetermined pattern.

[Color change (second parameter)]
FIG. 110 is a diagram exemplifying a color change inside the right-handed instruction display 658 as a second parameter (second factor) defining and characterizing the effect of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. Here, the color change is a temporal change in color. By the color change as the second parameter, the image of the entire right-handing instruction display 658 can be impressed to the player.

  The effect control device 300 can temporally change the color inside the right-stroke instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41. However, as a moving image (movie, animation), the color inside the right-strike instruction display 658 can be changed. May be changed over time.

  (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110A show the time change of the color of the character image 658a in the image of the right-stroke instruction display 658, and as time elapses, (A1) → (A2) → (A3) The color of each part of the character image 658a changes. The inside of the character image 658a is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), and a blue region 661A represented by vertical stripes, a green region 661B represented by oblique stripes, a yellow region 661C represented by lattice stripes, and a red region represented by mesh stripes 661D are present. Each color region is arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen, but may be arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction) or oblique direction.

  In (A1) of FIG. 110A, a blue region 661A, a green region 661B, a yellow region 661C, and a red region 661D are arranged from the left, and in (A2), a blue region 661A extends in the center, and a green color extends outward in the left-right direction. An area 661B, a yellow area 661C, and a red area 661D are arranged. In (A3), a red area 661D, a yellow area 661C, a green area 661B, and a blue area 661A are arranged from the left, contrary to (A1).

  (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110A show a temporal change of the color of the graphic image 658b in the image of the right-stroke instruction display 658, and as time elapses, (B1) → (B2) → (B3). The color of each part of the graphic image 658b changes. The inside of the graphic image 658b is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), and a blue region 661A represented by vertical stripes, a green region 661B represented by oblique stripes, a yellow region 661C represented by lattice stripes, and a red region represented by mesh stripes 661D are present.

  In (B1) of FIG. 110A, a red region 663D, a yellow region 663C, a green region 663B, and a blue region 663A are arranged from the left, and in (B2), a blue region 663A extends in the center, and the green region extends outward in the left-right direction. An area 663B, a yellow area 663C, and a red area 663D are arranged. In (B3), a blue area 663A, a green area 663B, a yellow area 663C, and a red area 663D are arranged from the left, contrary to (B1).

  In FIG. 110A, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b temporally changes in various modes. For example, the left portion (hand-biased portion) of the character "stroke" of the character image 658a changes from green to blue to yellow, and the right portion ("cho") of the character "stroke" changes from yellow to blue to green. Change.

  More simply, as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110B, the character image is moved to the right so that the blue region 661A, the green region 661B, the yellow region 661C, and the red region 661D flow. Right-handed information may be reported according to the direction in which the color 658a flows. Similarly, as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110B, the graphic image is moved to the right so that the red area 661D, the yellow area 661C, the green area 661B, and the blue area 661A flow. Right-handed information may be reported according to the direction in which the color 658b flows.

  In addition, for convenience of illustration, in FIG. 110, the blue region 663A, the green region 663B, the yellow region 663C, and the red region 663D are arranged with clear boundaries, but as shown in FIG. Instead, the image may gradually (laterally) change in the left-right direction according to the hue circle. Note that (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 111 correspond to (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 110, respectively.

  FIG. 111 is an example in which the color is gradually changed in the left and right direction (spatially) according to the hue circle in the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b. In FIG. 111, a dark portion is a reddish color, and a light portion is a bluish color. For example, in FIG. 111, orange appears between yellow and red, and yellow-green appears between green and yellow. In FIG. 111, the color inside the character image 658a changes over time as (A1) → (A2) → (A3). Also, in FIG. 111, the color inside the graphic image 658b changes over time as (B1) → (B2) → (B3).

  Further, the time change of the colors (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIGS. 110 and 111 is merely an example, and is not limited to this. For example, when the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are painted in a single color instead of multicolor, the entire color (one color) of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is made to gradually change over time according to the hue circle. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c does not change over time, but may change over time similarly to the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b. For example, the portion of the frame image 658c and the portion of the graphic image 658b that opposes (adjoins) the frame image 658c may change in time with a different color or the same color. In the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c is a single color (for example, white), but may be a multicolor.

[Change in display position (third parameter, movement)]
FIG. 112 shows a change in the display position of the right-handing instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, as a third parameter (third factor) defining and characterizing the effect of the relentless notification effect by the right-handing instruction display 658, that is, FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating the movement of a right-handed instruction display 658. By changing the display position (moving) as the third parameter, the image of the entire right-handing instruction display 658 can be impressed to the player.

  The effect control device 300 can change the display position of the right-hand instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, and can move the right-hand instruction display 658. Effect control device 300 may move right-handed instruction display 658 as a moving image (movie, animation).

  In FIG. 112, the entire right-handing instruction display 658 including the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c moves within the display screen of the display device 41, and the display position of the right-handing instruction display 658 is temporally changed. Change. The moving direction of the right-handing instruction display 658 is a rightward direction toward the right side to notify (instruction, recommendation, and guidance) of right-handing.

  The arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handed instruction display 658 is fixed even if the right-handed instruction display 658 moves. That is, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c move integrally. In the right-stroke instruction display 658, the character image 658a is arranged on the right side of the integrated graphic image 658b and frame image 658c. Note that the arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handed instruction display 658 changes with time in order to improve the interest of the game, and the right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed. A configuration that changes with movement is also possible.

  First, in (E1) of FIG. 112, first, the character image 658a “Right-Right” appears from the leftmost position on the display screen and moves to the right. Due to the form (first parameter), color change (second parameter), and display position change (third parameter) of the character image 658a (first image), right-handed information is impressed to the player. Be informed.

  Next, in (e2), the graphic image 658b (second image) and the frame image 658c (third image) that are integrally combined appear from the leftmost position and move to the right. The right-handed information is impressively notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the image itself of the graphic image 658b. Depending on the form of the frame image 658c itself and the change in the display position, right-handed information is impressively notified to the player. Note that the right-handed information may be impressed and notified to the player by the color change of the frame image 658c.

  If the right-handed information is notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the graphic image 658b (second image) or the frame image 658c (third image), the character information In addition to the character image 658a, the right-handed information can be reliably notified by one arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c that are integrally combined.

  Next, in (e3), the character image 658a “right-handed” that has moved rightward reaches the right end position on the display screen and disappears from the display screen. After that, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c that have moved rightward also reach the right end position and disappear from the display screen.

  Further, in (E1) to (E3), the effect control device 300 changes the right-handed instruction display 665 for notifying the right-handed information independently of the relentless information effect by the right-handed instruction display 658 to the relentless information effect. At the same time, it is displayed on the display device 41. The right-handed instruction display 665 (fourth image) notifies the player of right-handed information as one piece of information only by the form (first parameter) of the image itself. In FIG. 114, the right-handed instruction display 665 is a graphic image (fourth image) indicating an arrow, but may be a character image indicating a character (for example, “right-handed”).

  The right-handed instruction display 665 (second right-handed instruction display) is different from the right-handed instruction display 658 (first right-handed instruction display) because the displayed position is fixed without moving and the color does not change. Thus, the right-handed information is inconspicuously reported independently of the relentless notification effect based on the plurality of parameters of the right-handed instruction display 658. Also, the right-handed instruction display 665 is smaller than the right-handed instruction display 658, and is therefore inconspicuous. The right strike instruction display 665 is continued in the special game state and / or the time saving / probable change state (specific game state) to which the transition is made after the special game state, like the right strike instruction display 657 of the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. May be displayed. That is, the right-handed instruction display 665 can be displayed not only at the same time as the right-handed instruction display 658 but also in a situation different from that of the right-handed instruction display 658, so that the right-handed instruction display 658 is longer than the right-handed instruction display 658. The right-handed instruction display 658 is smaller and less noticeable. The right-handed instruction display 665 may have the same size as the right-handed instruction display 658, and may be made inconspicuous by being displayed thinly.

  In (e1) to (e3), an effect image 658d movable with respect to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is added to the frame image 658c. The effect image 658d will be described later.

[Add effect (4th parameter, emphasis)]
FIG. 113 shows the addition of the effect image 658d to the right-handed instruction display 658 (here, the frame image 658c) as the fourth parameter (fourth factor) that defines and characterizes the production mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. FIG. By adding the effect (adding the effect image 658d) as the fourth parameter, the right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player.

  The effect control device 300 can move by changing the display position of the effect image 658d. The effect control device 300 may move the effect image 658d as a moving image (movie, animation).

  As shown in (A1) to (A3) in FIG. 113, the effect image 658d is relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c over time as (A1) → (A2) → (A3). By moving to the right, right-handed information is reported. Further, by moving the effect image 658d, the integrated arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized, and the right-handed information based on the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be notified in an emphasized manner. The effect image 658d may move on the frame image 658c, move to the right end of the frame image 658c, and then start moving from the left end to the right again.

  Further, as another example of the effect image 658d, the effect image 658d moves rightward on a frame image 658c surrounding the character image 658a with a gap as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. It may be. The shape of the effect image 658d is not constant and may change with time. The effect image 658d notifies right-handed information by moving to the right relative to the character image 658a and the frame image 658c as (B1) → (B2) → (B3) over time. I do.

[Example of existence of each parameter]
FIG. 114 is a diagram exemplifying the presence / absence of each parameter (each factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the notification presentation by right-handed instruction display. The notification effect can be impressed to the player by each parameter (each factor).

  As described above, the first notification effect (the right-handed instruction display 658) including a plurality of images of the first image (character image 658a), the second image (graphic image 658b), and the third image (frame image 658c) ( That is, the relentless notification effect) is right-handed by the first parameter (form of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter (effect addition) of each image. It is possible to relentlessly notify the player of right-handed information for recommending. The first notification effect (that is, relentless notification effect) is characterized by at least two or more parameters. On the other hand, in the second notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 665 including only the fourth image (graphic image), the right-handed information is notified to the player only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

  In the example of FIG. 114, as described above, the presentation of the first image (character image 658a) and the second image (graphic image 658b) are characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The rendering of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by a first parameter, a third parameter, and a fourth parameter.

  Note that the rendering of the first image and the second image may be characterized by a fourth parameter (addition of an effect), and the rendering of the third image may be characterized by a second parameter (color change). Good.

  In another example of FIG. 115, the rendering of the first image (character image 658a) is characterized by a first parameter, a second parameter, and a fourth parameter. The presentation of the second image (the graphic image 658b) is characterized by the first parameter and the third parameter. The rendering of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by a first parameter, a second parameter, a third parameter, and a fourth parameter. The first notification effect (that is, relentless notification effect) is characterized by at least two or more parameters.

  In addition to the first to fourth parameters described in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, parameters that characterize the production mode of the relentless notification production include, as a fifth parameter, the addition of a sound from a speaker ("Please right-click"). Etc.), light emission of a light emitting member (LED of the board effect device 44) arranged on the right side of the game board 30 or the like as a sixth parameter, temporal change of shading of each image as a seventh parameter, and an eighth parameter There may be a temporal change in the shape of each image (for example, a change from (A) to (B) to (C) in FIG. 109). In addition, the spatial change itself of the color of each image or the spatial change itself of light and shade can be regarded as a parameter.

[Modified example of relentless information production]
FIG. 116 is a screen transition diagram showing a modified example of the presentation mode of the relentless notification production by the right-handed instruction display 658. In FIG. 116, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may be temporally changed in the same direction of the hue circle. For example, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b temporally changes in one direction of the hue circle (red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green → ...). You may.

  In FIG. 116, the display screen of the display device 41 is divided and set in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) into a blue region 41A, a green region 41B, a yellow region 41C, and a red region 41D. Then, in the moving character image 658a and the graphic image 658b, a portion overlapping the blue region 41A is a blue region 661A painted in blue, a portion overlapping the green region 41B is a green region 661B painted in green, and overlaps the yellow region 41C. The portion is set to a yellow region 661C painted in yellow, and the portion overlapping the red region 41D is set to a red region 661D painted in red. In this way, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is changed in one direction of the hue circle (... red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → It changes over time as shown by green → ...).

  Further, the effect image 658d may be always displayed at the position of the vertical center line on the display screen. Even in this case, the effect image 658d moves relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c due to the movement of the frame image 658c, and emphasizes the right-handed information of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c. Can be displayed. However, since the effect image 658d itself moves to the left relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, the right-handed information cannot be reported.

(Left-hand instruction display)
In FIG. 109 to FIG. 113, a description has been given of the production mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-turning instruction display 658, but as in the screen transition diagram of FIG. A persistent information effect of hit information may be executed.

  In FIG. 117 (key 1) to (key 3), a left-handing instruction including a plurality of images of a first image (character image 659a), a second image (graphic image 659b), and a third image (frame image 659c). The first notification effect by the display 659 (that is, the relentless notification effect) includes a first parameter (a form of the image itself), a second parameter (color change), a third parameter (display position change), and a fourth parameter of each image. With (effect addition), left-handed information for recommending left-handed can be persistently notified to the player. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the left-handed instruction display 667 including only the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of left-handed information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

  Note that the left-handed state (normal game state) is more disadvantageous for the player than the right-handed state (probable change state or the like), and thus the left-handed instruction display 659 is different from the right-handed instruction display 658. Is also good. For example, the left strike instruction display 659 may be different in color from the right strike instruction display 658. The left strike instruction display 659 may be changed spatially and temporally with a plain color such as gray, or may be made a single color so as not to change spatially and temporally (no second parameter). In addition, in the left-handed instruction display 659, addition of an effect may be eliminated (no fourth parameter).

  As described above, the persistent reporting effect has been described, but the persistent reporting effect of the present embodiment can also be applied to the case of reporting information other than how to strike. Examples of notification of information other than the hitting method include, for example, notification of an operation instruction of the effect button 25, notification of a temporary stop of a decorative special design (reach notification), notification of a big hit occurrence (fan fare), and notification of a round during a big hit. and so on. The notification of the operation instruction of the effect button 25 is, for example, notification by a character image such as “press a button” and a graphic image imitating the operation button. The notification of the temporary stop of the decorative special design is, for example, notification by a character image of “reach” or the like. The notification of the occurrence of the big hit is, for example, a notification using a character image of “big hit”. The notification of the round is notification by a character image such as “1 round” and “3 rounds”.

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) for displaying the identification information in a variable manner. The effect control unit includes a first image (for example, a character image 658a), a second image (for example, a graphic image 658b), and a third image (for example, a frame image 658c) characterized by at least a first parameter (for example, a form of the image itself). ) On the display device 41, it is possible to execute a relentless notification effect of relentlessly reporting one piece of information (for example, right-handed information). At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a second parameter (for example, color change) and a third parameter (for example, display position change) in addition to the first parameter. One piece of information (for example, right-handed information) can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to display (notify) one piece of information on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner to impress a player by a persistent information effect using three images and three parameters. For example, even if one piece of information is preferentially displayed on the front side (upper layer), there is a possibility that a situation in which the background changes sharply may become difficult to see, but such a situation can be prevented. In addition, even a beginner player or a player who does not speak a predetermined language (Japanese) as a native language, one information is displayed on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner by a persistent information effect using three images and three parameters. It can be displayed (notified) to give an impression. In addition, the three images and the three parameters make the relentless notification effect lively, and the interest of the game increases.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) notifies the player of one piece of information based on the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the first image, and then performs the second One piece of information can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the image or the third image. Therefore, it is possible to impress a relentless notification effect many times by using the three parameters.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) outputs the fourth image (for example, the image of the right-handed instruction display 665) that reports one piece of information independently of the persistent production, At the same time, it can be displayed on the display device 41. The fourth image notifies the player of one piece of information according to the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). Therefore, by displaying the fourth image in addition to the relentless notification effect, one piece of information can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 in an easily understandable manner to impress the player. In addition, one information (for example, right-handed information) is always informed by the fourth image, and a special situation (for example, a situation where left-handed in a gaming state where right-handing is recommended) in which the necessity of informing is increased. ), It is possible to perform a flexible notification effect by executing a relentless notification effect and emphasizing and notifying one information (for example, right-handed information).

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image includes, in addition to the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter, a fourth parameter (for example, an effect Addition). The effect control means can notify the player of one piece of information by using the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. Therefore, it is possible to execute a relentless notification effect in which one piece of information is emphasized and notified, and the relentless notification effect becomes more lively, and the interest of the game is improved.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the first parameter is a form of each image itself, the second parameter is a color change of each image, the third parameter is a change of a display position of each image on the display device 41, The four parameters are the effect addition. Therefore, the appearance of the relentless notification performance itself becomes lively, and the interest of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 36 first start winning area (first start winning area)
36b LED
37 Ordinary variable winning device (2nd starting winning area)
39 Special fluctuation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board production device 44c, 44d Internal accessory (movable body)
46 Panel decoration device 50 Batch display device (LED)
51 1st special figure change display part (special figure 1 display)
52 2nd special figure change display part (special figure 2 display)
93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outside movable member)
102 Set value change switch 143 Probability set value display device 150 Driver 152 Status display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 payout control device 300 production control device (sub-board)
341 Error code 342 Error code 343 Character information 344 Underline 345 Broadcast information 400 Power supply unit 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel / serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Reserve display section 640 Reserve digestion area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for giving a player a gaming value when a display result of a variable display game for varying identification information is a special result,
A movable character performing a game production,
Start storage means capable of storing a start memory serving as an execution right of the variable display game based on establishment of a start condition;
The control of the movable accessory, and a control for displaying a start storage display corresponding to the start memory, the effect control means capable of executing,
The start storage means holds a start memory that has a special result when a power failure occurs in a state where the stored start memory includes a start memory that has a display result of the variable display game as a special result. And
The effect control means,
When a power failure occurs in a state in which the start memory stored by the start storage means includes a start memory in which a display result of the variable display game is a special result, the movable movable object is restored after the power failure is restored. Operate in the first operation,
In the variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable role is operated by a second operation,
In the special game state executed after the second operation, operating the movable auditorium in a third operation,
A gaming machine characterized by operating the same movable role in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation.